User Manual NL24x Family 16x2 and 34 Mb/s Radio-Relay Equipment

USER MANUAL NL24x Family 16x2 and 34 Mb/s Radio-Relay Equipment
B1078 Rev. R
Section I Section II Section III Section IV Section IV
: : : : :
Installation Operators Guide Configuration Frequency Setting Fault Finding
This page is intentionally left blank

2
B1078 Rev. R
List of Revisions
Rev.
B C D E
Date
01-11-96 04-12-96 23-01-97 07-03-97
What is changed
Section III,Configuration. New Chapter: Chapter 15, Alarm Output Unit 2KN225A Section III,Configuration. New Chapter: Chapter 16, Control Board Space Div., 3KN212A Section III,Configuration Corrected board drawing for 2NF533A Section I, Installation: New Chapter: Chapter 4, Split Mount Section II, Operators Guide, new SW for Split Mount version (HHT-guide) Section III,Configuration; 2NF533A; Corrected board drawing and added info on straps and switches (due to Split Mount version). 2NCS521A and 2NCS522A; Added info on switches. 2KN181A; Added note. 2KN182B: Changed DIL-switch tables. Section IV, Freq. setting; Missing LO-freq. added, new chapter for 15GHz. NEW: APPENDIX' 1-3. Section I, Installation: Corrected drawing for DDF-Panel external connections Section II, Operators Guide, new SW (HHT-guide) Section III,Configuration. New Chapter: Chapter 17, Line Interface, Cable, 2FY310A Addition to warning page 9. Section I, Installation: Fig. 3-8 Ext Conn. Ind. & Conn. Pnl. changed. Section II,Operators Guide; Table 5-68 param 148 corrected (R17 to R18) Section III,Configuration; 2CN64B: Corrected DIL-switch (S301) table. 2KCN178B: Corrected DIL-switch (S1) table. 2KN182B: Added note.Changed DIL-switch tables. UWB341: Corrected DIL-switch info (S2-10). 2KN225A: Corrected DIL-switch (S301) table and Connector J1 Alarm Name (Pin No11/12 & 15/16). Section IV, Freq. setting; Freq.-tables for 2GHz added 3
20-05-97
08-12-97
B1078
Rev. R
Rev.
H
Date
25-02-98
What is changed
Section I, Installation. DDF-Panel is changed. Section III, Configuration, Chapter 11, is changed; Correction to DIL-Switch setting. Section III, Configuration, Chapter 14, is changed; Not used Section III, Configuration, Chapter 5.2.2, is changed; Correction to DIL-Switch setting. Section III, Configuration, Chapter 8.2. DIL-Switch setting for Selective call is corrected. Section IV, Freq. Setting, Chapter 3.1. Additional frequency tables. Section IV, Freq. Setting, Chapter 3.1 and 3.2. Additional frequency tables. Section I, Installation. Fig 3-13 is corrected. Section III, Configuration, Chapter 2.0 Fig. 8MDN77B is changed. Chapter 3.3 Table is changed. Chapter 4.2 Table is changed. Chapter 8.0 2NF533B is introduced. Section IV, Freq. Setting, Chapter 3.1. Correction of frequency table. Not used Section I, Installation, Chapter 3 Fig 3-7 and 3-8 are changed Chapter 4.1; Changed. Section III, Configuration, Chapter 17.1. New note, new table presentation
I J 22-09-98
K L M
15-10-98 26-11-98 15-12-98
N O P
24-03-2000
10-11-2000
Q R
05-11-2001 04-09-2002
Section IV, Freq. Setting, Chapter 3.3. Additional frequency table. Section III, Configuration, Chapter 16.1. Correction of formula for calculation of delay.
B1078
Rev. R
WARNING!
Exposure to strong high frequency electromagnetic fields may cause thermal damage to personnel. The eye (Cornea and lens) is easily exposed. Any unnecessary exposure is undesirable and should be avoided. In Radio-Relay communication installations, orderly setup for normal operation, the general RF radiation level will be well below the safety limit. In the antennas and directly in front of them the RF intensity normally will exceed the danger level, within limited portions of space. Dangerous radiation may be found in the neighbourhood of open waveguide flanges or horns where the power is radiated into space. To avoid dangerous radiation the following precautions must be taken: r r r During work within and close to the front of the antenna; make sure that transmitters will remain turned off. Before opening coaxial - or waveguide connectors carrying RF power, turn off transmitters. Consider any incidentally open RF connector as carrying power, until otherwise proved. Do not look into coaxial connectors at closer than reading distance (30 cm). Do not look into an open waveguide unless you are absolutely sure that the power is turned off.
B1078
Rev. R

6
B1078 Rev. R
WARNING!
This equipment contains components which are sensitive to "ESD" (Electro Static Discharge). It is therefore essential that whenever disassembling the equipment and/ or handling PC boards, special precautions to avoid ESD has to be made. These precautions include personnel grounding, grounding of work bench, grounding of tools and instruments as well as transport and storage in special antistatic bags and boxes.
B1078
Rev. R

8
B1078 Rev. R
WARNING!
r r
DO NOT remove or insert the Transmitter / Receiver group with DC power on. See Section V - Unit Replacement for details. To avoid traffic disturbance during maintenance on one of the RF channels in a N+1 protected system, the traffic should be manually locked to the protection channel before any work is started. As only the negative battery circuit is fused as factory default, an additional fuse must be inserted in the positive battery circuit if the negative battery circuit is grounded. Otherwise the equipment can be seriously damaged.
B1078
Rev. R

10
B1078 Rev. R
Table of contents
SECTION I ............................................................. 21
1.0 PACKING,HANDLING AND STORING ........................ 1.1 Packing ............................................................ 1.2 Marking ............................................................ 1.3 Transportation ................................................. 1.4 Storing and Inspection Upon Arrival ................. 1.5 Preparation for Installation ............................... 1.6 Handling .......................................................... RACK EQUIPMENT MOUNTING .................................. 2.1 General ............................................................ 2.2 Preparation ...................................................... 2.2.1 Tools required ................................................. 2.2.2 List of Installation Material ................................ 2.3 Mounting Procedure ........................................ 2.3.1 Floor Mounting ................................................. 2.3.2 Support of Rack Top ........................................ 2.3.3 Side Panels ..................................................... 2.4 Earthing ........................................................... 23 23 23 23 24 24 24 27 27 27 27 27 28 28 29 29 34
2.0
3.0 4.0
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ........................................ 35 SPLIT MOUNT .............................................................. 4.1 Split Mount Cable ............................................ 4.2 Outdoor Mounted DRR Box ........................... 4.2.1 Measurements ................................................. 4.3 Single DRR Box Mounted to Column ............... 4.4 Waveguide Connection to DRR Box ................ 4.5 Outdoor Mounted Equipment ........................... 50 51 55 56 57 58 60
B1078
Rev. R
11
SECTION II ............................................................ 61
1.0 2.0 3.0 PREFACE ..................................................................... 63 BOARD/UNIT REPLACEMENT .................................... 64 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ........................................ 3.1 Adapter Connections ....................................... 3.2 Data Distribution Frame ................................... 3.3 Front Connections ........................................... 3.4 Service Telephone Connection ........................ 3.4.1 Selective Call Version ...................................... 3.4.2 Collective Call Version ..................................... 3.5 Parity Error Measurements .............................. 3.6 External Insert Channel Synchronization .......... 3.7 Synchronization of External Equipment to the Insert Channels .......................................... 3.8 Data Interconnection between the Radio and the Baseband Shelf ......................................... 3.9 2Mb/s Insertion Channel Interconnection ......... 68 68 69 70 71 71 71 72 72 72 73 74
4.0
NL24x SYSTEM OPERATION ...................................... 75 4.1 Indicator & Connection Unit ............................. 77 4.2 Data Distribution Frame ................................... 78 4.3 Front Connections on Transceiver and Modem 79 4.4 Operation of Switches on the Fronts of ............ the Circuit Boards ............................................ 80 4.5 Use of Switch Matrix Board on Add/Drop Repeaters 85 4.5.1 Adding/Dropping Maximum 4 Channels ........... 87 4.5.2 Adding/Dropping Maximum 8 Channels ........... 88 4.5.3 Adding/Dropping on 2+0 or 2+1 Repeaters ...... 89 OPERATORS GUIDE FOR HAND HELD TERMINAL (HHT) ......................................................... 5.1 General Description ......................................... 5.1.1 Technical Data ................................................ 5.1.2 Hardware Connection ...................................... 5.2 Functional Description ..................................... 91 91 93 93 94
Rev. R
5.0
12
B1078
5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.2.1 5.2.2.2 5.2.2.2.1 5.2.2.2.2 5.2.2.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.5.1 5.2.5.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.1.1 5.3.1.2 5.3.1.3 5.3.1.4 5.3.1.5 5.3.1.6 5.3.1.7 5.3.1.8 5.3.1.9 5.3.1.10 5.3.1.11 5.3.1.12 5.3.1.13 5.3.1.14 5.3.1.15 5.3.1.16 5.3.1.17 5.3.1.18 5.3.1.19 5.3.1.20 5.3.1.21 5.3.1.22 5.3.1.23
B1078 Rev. R
Key Functions ............................................. Display Layout ............................................ Menu System .............................................. Station and Unit Address ............................. Section Address (Sec:) ................................ Station Address (Sta:) ................................. Internal Unit Address (Intu:) ......................... Parameter Access ....................................... Information Text Field .................................. Start Up, Introduction Picture ...................... System Type Line2: .................................... Station Type Line3: ..................................... Configuration Menu (F1) ............................. SU Configuration Parameters ...................... Equipment (SU param 0) ............................. NL Code (SU param 1) ................................ Serial Number (SU param 2) ....................... Display Units Connected (SU param 8) ....... System Type (SU param 10) ....................... No of AAUs (SU param 11).......................... SIC1 Type (SU param 15) ........................... Stationno (SU param 16) ............................. Sectionno (SU param 17) ............................ Space Diversity (SU param 18) ................... Network Serial Port (NetA and NetB) Configuration (SU param 20-23) ................. Bypass_352 (SU param 24) ........................ RmtReset (SU param 25) ............................ SetClock (SU param 26) ............................. SUs In Sec (SU param 29) .......................... SEC In Net (SU param 30) ......................... NetToBackp (SU param 31) ........................ Network Configuration (SU param 32-47 and 100-211) ................... Display/Set Real Time Clock (SU param 48-59) PC/HHTBaud (SU param 214) .................... PC/SICBaud (SU param 215) ...................... Software Release (SU param 237) .............. NetAConfig (SU param 240) ........................
94 98 99 99 100 100 101 102 102 103 104 105 106 106 107 108 108 108 109 109 110 110 110 110 111 111 111 112 112 112 112 113 113 114 114 114 114
13
5.3.1.24 5.3.2 5.3.2.1 5.3.2.2 5.3.2.3 5.3.2.4 5.3.3 5.3.3.1 5.3.3.2 5.3.3.3 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.1.1 5.4.1.2 5.4.1.3 5.4.1.4 5.4.1.5 5.4.1.6 5.4.1.7 5.4.1.8 5.4.1.9 5.4.1.10 5.4.1.11 5.4.1.12 5.4.1.13 5.4.1.14 5.4.1.15 5.4.1.16 5.4.1.17 5.4.1.18 5.4.1.19 5.4.1.20 5.4.1.21 5.4.1.22 5.4.1.23 5.4.1.24
14
NetBConfig (SU param 241) ........................ 114 ACU Configuration Parameters ................... 115 Transmitter Power Control (ACU param 20) 115 Transmitter Manual Power Attenuation (ACU param 21) .......................................... 115 Receiver ATPC Reference Level (ACU param 22) 116 Software Release (ACU param 237) ........... 116 16x2 Mb/s ACU Configuration Parameters .. 116 Unit Type (16x2 ACU param 11) ................. 117 Bit 12, National Use (16x2 ACU param 12, 13) .. 118 Switch Matrix Drop/Insert Configuration (16x2 ACU param 33-48) ............................. 118 Security Menu (F2)...................................... 119 SU Security Parameters .............................. 119 ControlOut (SU param 12) ........................... 120 Alignment1 (SU param 13) .......................... 120 Alignment2 (SU param 14) .......................... 120 Hot Standby Switch Control (SU param 19) 121 Standby Channel (SU param 60) ................ 121 Alignment Timeout (SU param 61) ............... 121 High Priority Manual Switching (SU param 62) .. 121 Low Priority Manual Switching (SU param 63) ... 122 Channel 1 Switching Priority (SU param 64) 122 Channel 2 Switching Priority (SU param 65) 122 Switch Limit (SU param 66) ......................... 122 Reswitch Limit (SU param 67) ..................... 123 Alarm Mask Channel P (SU param 68) ........ 123 Alarm Mask Channel 1 (SU param 69) ........ 123 Alarm Mask Channel 2 (SU param 70) ........ 123 Manual Channel (SU param 71) .................. 123 Manual Priority (SU param 72) .................... 124 Manual Mode (SU param 73) ...................... 124 Manual Action (SU param 74) ..................... 124 Manual Error Code (SU param 75) .............. 125 ChP Manually switched in Rx Direction (SU param 76) ............................................. 125 Use of Channel P in Rx Direction (SU param 77) 126 Use of Channel P in Tx Direction (SU param 78) 126 Channel P Switch Criteria Status (SU param 79) 126
B1078 Rev. R
5.4.1.25 5.4.1.26 5.4.1.27 5.4.1.28 5.4.1.29 5.4.1.30 5.4.1.31 5.4.2 5.4.2.1 5.4.2.2 5.4.2.3 5.4.2.4 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.1.1 5.5.1.2 5.5.2 5.5.2.1 5.5.2.2 5.5.2.3 5.5.2.4 5.5.2.5 5.5.2.6 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.1.1 5.6.1.2 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.1.1 5.7.1.2 5.7.1.3 5.7.1.4 5.7.1.5 5.7.2
B1078 Rev. R
Channel 1 Switch Criteria Status (SU param 80) Channel 2 Switch Criteria Status (SU param 81) AIS Occasional Traffic Output (SU param 82) .... AIS Alignment Channel 1 (SU param 83) ..... AIS Alignment Channel 2 (SU param 84) ..... Switching Order Communication (SU param 85) Manual Switching Status (SU param 86) ..... ACU Security Parameters............................ Display XMTR Switch Setting (ACU param 12).. HBER Selection (ACU param 15) ................ 34 Mb/s AIS Configuration (ACU param 16-17) .. 2 Mb/s AIS Configuration (ACU param 18-19) ... Fault Menu (F3) .......................................... SU Fault Parameters ................................... A/D Display Mode (SU param 212) .............. A/D Mode (SU param 213) .......................... ACU Fault Parameters ................................ Analogue Values (ACU param 81-91) .......... Configuration of AGC Main Measurement (ACU param 97) .......................................... Alarm List for Bit Insert/Extract ACU (ACU param 99-172) ................................... Alarm list for Mux/Demux ACU (16x2 ACU param 101-180) ......................... Alarm List for Switch Matrix ACU (16x2 ACU param 101-220) ......................... Adaptive Alarms .......................................... Quality Menu (F4) ....................................... ACU Quality parameters .............................. Quality Period (ACU param 28-29) .............. Error Counter Reset (ACU param 26-27 and 72) Test menu (F5) ........................................... SU Test Parameters .................................... 34 Mb/s test Direction (SU param 90) ......... 34 Mb/s Test Channel (SU param 91) ......... 34 Mb/s Loop Type (SU param 92) ............. 34 Mb/s Loop (SU param 93) ...................... 34 Mb/s PRBS (SU param 94) .................... ACU Test Parameters .................................
127 127 127 127 128 128 128 129 129 129 130 131 132 132 132 132 133 134 134 135 137 139 144 145 145 146 146 147 147 147 148 148 149 150 151
15
5.7.2.1
2 Mb/s Wayside Loop on Bit Insert/Extract Unit (ACU param 13) .......................................... 5.7.2.2 2 Mb/s Wayside Loop on 2 Mb/s Adapter (ACU param 14) .......................................... 5.7.3 16x2 Mb/s ACU Test Parameters ................ 5.7.3.1 2 Mb/s Test Direction (16x2 ACU param 14) 5.7.3.2 2 Mb/s Test Channel (16x2 ACU param 15) 5.7.3.3 2Mb/s Test Function (16x2 ACU param 16) . 5.7.3.4 2Mb/s Looping (16x2 ACU param 16) .......... 5.7.3.5 PRBS Insertion and Check (16x2 ACU param 16-21) ............................. 5.7.3.6 CRC-4 Check (16x2 ACU param 25-29) ...... 5.7.3.7 Reset of PRBS/CRC-4 Error Counters ........ (16x2 ACU param 20 and 28) ...................... 5.8 Password Menu (F8) ................................... 5.9 Alarm Adapter Unit ...................................... 5.9.1 AAU Parameters .......................................... 5.9.1.1 Relay Operation .......................................... 5.9.1.1.1 Relay Mode (AAU param 16, 20, 24, 28) ..... 5.9.1.1.2 Relay Default position (AAU param 17, 21, 25, 29) . 5.9.1.1.3 Relay Timeout/Operation (AAU param 18, 22, 26, 30) ......................... 5.9.1.1.4 Relay Status (AAU param 19, 23, 27, 31) .... 5.9.1.2 Alarm Parameters ........................................ 5.9.1.2.1 Alarm Defaults (AAU param 151-160) .......... 5.9.1.2.2 Alarm Status (AAU param 101-116) ............. 5.9.1.3 Software Release (AAU param 237) ............ 5.10 Examples .................................................... 5.10.1 Network Configuration ................................. 5.10.2 Network Routing Table Configuration ......... 5.10.2.1 Network Routing Table Configuration Example.. 5.10.3 Network Serial Port Configuration. .............. 5.10.3.1 Network Serial Port Configuration Example . 5.10.4 Manual Switching ........................................ 5.10.5 Manual Reswitching .................................... 5.10.6 Example 3, Configuration of Occasional Traffic .. 5.10.7 Example 4, Changing the Password ............ Appendix 1 ....................................................................
16
151 152 152 153 153 153 154 155 155 157 157 159 159 160 160 160 161 162 162 162 163 163 164 164 164 165 166 167 168 172 174 175 177
B1078
Rev. R
SECTION III ........................................................... 179

1.0 2.0 General ......................................................................... 181 Modem, 8MDN77B ....................................................... 2.1 Straps .............................................................. 2.2 DIL-Switch Settings .......................................... 2.3 Coaxial connectors .......................................... Bit Insert/Extract/ACU, 2CN64B ................................. 3.1 Straps .............................................................. 3.2 Manual Switch Settings ................................... 3.3 DIL-Switch Settings .......................................... 181 182 183 183 184 185 185 185
3.0
4.0
Alignment/Switch/Hybrid, 2NCS468A ........................ 186 4.1 Straps .............................................................. 186 4.2 Manual Switch Setting ..................................... 186 Supervisory & Subinsert, 2KCN178B ........................ 5.1 Straps .............................................................. 5.2 DIL-Switches .................................................... 5.2.1 Switch S1......................................................... 5.2.2 Switch S3......................................................... 5.2.3 Switch S902 ..................................................... 5.2.4 Switch S4......................................................... 5.2.5 Station Type Setup .......................................... 16x2 Mb/s Mux/Demux, 2NCS521A ............................ 6.1 Straps .............................................................. 6.2 Manual Switch Setting ..................................... 6.3 DIL-Switch Settings .......................................... Switch Matrix Board, 2NCS522A ................................ 7.1 Straps .............................................................. 7.2 Manual Switch Setting ..................................... 7.3 DIL-Switch Settings .......................................... 187 187 187 187 189 190 191 192 193 193 194 194 195 196 196 197
5.0
6.0
7.0
B1078
Rev. R
17
8.0
Service Channel Selective Call, 2NF533A/B ............. 199 8.1 Straps .............................................................. 200 8.2 DIL-Switch Settings .......................................... 201 Service Channel Collective Call, 2NF467A ............... 204 9.1 Strapping ......................................................... 205 Alarm Adapter Unit, 2KN181A .................................... 10.1 Straps .............................................................. 10.2 Manual Reset Switch ....................................... 10.3 DIL-Switches .................................................... 207 208 209 209
9.0 10.0
11.0 12.0
Adapter 64 kb/s, 2KN182B .......................................... 210 11.1 DIL-Switches .................................................... 211 2 Mb/s Adapter, 2KN213A ........................................... 213 12.1 Straps .............................................................. 214 12.2 DIL-Switch Settings .......................................... 214 PABX Adapter, 2N579A ............................................... 13.1 Straps .............................................................. 13.1.1 Strapping of PABX Adapter .............................. 13.1.2 Strapping of Service Channel, 2NF533A/B ...... 13.1.3 System Strapping and Wiring of Control Signal 215 216 216 216 217
13.0
14.0 15.0
Connection Panel, Baseband, UWB340 and UWB341 ..... 220 14.1 DIL-Switches .................................................... 222 Alarm Out Unit, 2KN225A ............................................ 225 15.1 DIL-Switch settings .......................................... 226 15.2 Connector J1 ................................................... 226 Control Board Space Diversity, 3KN212A ................ 16.1 Delay and Delay Calculation ............................ 16.2 Delay Setting ................................................... 16.3 Calibration ....................................................... 228 229 229 229
16.0
17.0
18
Line Interface, Cable, 2FY310A ................................ 230 17.1 DIL-Switch S1 .................................................. 230
B1078 Rev. R
SECTION IV........................................................... 231

1.0 FREQUENCY SETTING PROCEDURE, 2-13GHz ........ 1.1 2GHz ............................................................... 1.1.1 Space Diversity systems .................................. 1.2 5GHz and higher .............................................. 1.2.1 Space Diversity systems .................................. 233 233 233 234 235
2.0 3.0
FREQUENCY SETTING PROCEDURE, 15GHz ........... 239 RF CHANNEL ARRANGEMENT .................................. 3.1 2 GHz .............................................................. 3.2 5 GHz .............................................................. 3.3 7 GHz .............................................................. 3.4 8 GHz .............................................................. 3.5 13 GHz ............................................................ 3.6 15 GHz ............................................................ 242 242 251 255 267 269 273
SECTION V ........................................................... 277

1.0 2.0 GENERAL ..................................................................... 279 SYSTEM TROUBLE SHOOTING BY MEANS OF THE HHT ..279 2.1 Main Alarm ....................................................... 279 2.1.1 Fault finding ..................................................... 280 2.2 Urgent Alarm .................................................... 280 2.2.1 Fault finding ..................................................... 280 ERROR CHECKING FLOW CHARTS .......................... 280 3.1 Main Alarm Flow Charts ................................... 281 ALARM LIST ................................................................ 288
3.0 4.0
APPENDIX I Technical Specifications .................................... 291 APPENDIX II Abbreviations ..................................................... 293 APPENDIX III Index................................................................... 295
B1078 Rev. R
19

20
B1078 Rev. R
SECTION I
Installation
B1078
Rev. Q
21
I Installation

22
B1078 Rev. Q
1.0
1.1
PACKING,HANDLING AND STORING

Packing
I Installation
Any sensitive product, i.e. Printed Circuit Boards, are packed in special antistatic handling bags or boxes. It is therefore essential that whenever unpacking or disassembling the equipment and or handling printed circuit boards etc., special precautions to avoid ESD (Electro Static Discharge) have to be made, such as using wrist grounding or corresponding protection. The equipment racks with shelves and units are packed in sealed plastic bags which are equipped with required moisture protection. All equipment are further packed in wooden cases prepared for transportation. Dimensions and weight of each case are specified in the "Packing specifications" issued for the respective shipment.
1.2
Marking
Marking is done according to customers requirements. If such information is unavailable, the equipment is marked in the following way: Customers address Contract No. Site Name (if known) Case No.
1.3
Transportation
The transport containers are prepared for shipment by air, truck, railway and sea, suitable for handling by fork-lift trucks and slings. The cargo must be kept dry during transport and storage. For sea-transport, deck-side shipment is not permitted and carrier-owned cargo containers should be used.
B1078
Rev. Q
23
1.4
Storing and Inspection Upon Arrival

Look for damages on the wooden cases. Count the number of cases received against shipping documents. Report any damage or missing items to Nera by telex or fax. A short description of damages, preferably including photographs, should be sent as soon as possible. The equipment is an electronic device which should be handled with care. It should be stored in dry, cool conditions, out of direct sunlight. A moisture absorbing bag is taped inside the unit to minimise condensation during transportation. This is to be removed at installation. No maintenance is required when stored according to particulars above.
1.5
Preparation for Installation

Complete the required civil works. Transport all the equipment to site. Unpack the equipment and inspect for damage during transit to site and make sure that the correct quantities of goods have arrived. Units with static discharge protection should not be unpacked until insertion into its place (slot) in the equipment takes place. Discharge yourself before insertion of the unit.
1.6
Handling
It is recommended that components are stored and transported to the installation site in their original packing cases. If items are unpacked for storage, they should be handled with care and protected during transportation by similar protective materials.
24
B1078
Rev. Q
NOTE 2 50
227
127(
PRIMARY POWER : 20 to 60 V DC TERMINAL 1 + 1 Power consumption : Approx. 120 W One rack / Weight : Approx. 30 Kg TERMINAL REPEATER 1 + 1 Power consumption : Approx. 240 W Two racks / Weight : Approx. 60 Kg TERMINAL 2 + 1 with space diversity Power consumption : Approx. 205 W Three racks / Weight : Approx. 80 Kg TERM. REP. 2 + 1 with space diversity Power consumption : Approx. 405 W Six racks / Weight : Approx. 160 Kg
2,0 m
Fully equipped
127(
WAVEGUIDE CONNECTION EQPT FREQ NL243 2 GHz NL242 5 GHz NL241 7,5 GHz NL245 8 GHz NL248 13 GHz FLANGE EIA 7/8 PDR 48 PDR 70 PDR 84 PDR120
FRONT
SIDE PANEL
20 120
224
BASE
260 227
RACK UNITS
160 TERMINAL 1 + 1 TERMINAL REPEATER 1 + 1 280 400

TERMINAL 2 + 1 with space diversity. ( Repeater, 6 racks, 760 mm )
Fig. 1-2
I-46299 Rev. A RACK ARRANGEMENT
B1078
Rev. Q
25
I Installation
86
227 H O LE 10 x 20
127(
RACK TY PE (height) 2,0 m 2,2 m
+ mm +
203 2 219 5
mm
20 61 5 22 24 5
H 2 = ( S ee NO TE 1 )
SIDE PANEL
H 1 = ( S ee NOTE 1 )
FRONT
$
RE A R
SIDE
110
120 20 20
224 38 44 38
110 114
HOLE DIA. 12
$ $
Fig. 1-2
I-46227 Rev. C OUTLINE DIMENSIONS SLIM RACK
26
B1078
Rev. Q
2.0
2.1
RACK EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

General
I Installation
This document describes the assembly and installation sequence for the rack used for NL240 serial equipment codes.
2.2
Preparation
1. Unpack the equipment and installation material. Pay notice to any special instructions refered to in Chapter 1.0 (this Section). 2. Check the Packing List and the Installation Layout Drawings.
2.2.1
Tools required
r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r Spanner 7mm, 8mm, 17mm Socket 7mm, 13mm Ratchet Handle Adjustable Spanner, 0 - 20mm Hammer Drill Masonry Bit, 12mm Hammer, small Allen Wrench (hexagon) 3mm, 5mm Square Spirit Level Tape Measure Pencil Hacksaw Flat File Screwdriver, Flat 3mm Torque Wrench for SMA Connectors
2.2.2
List of Installation Material

ITEM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DESCRIPTION Slim Rack Side panel Spacer (Part of MCB72) Bracket Bracket Bracket Base plate (1 rack) Base plate (4 racks) Base plate (2 racks) Base plate (3 racks) CODE (part of eqpt. NL-code) MCB72 V404062 MBB492-1 MBB492-1 V404070 V404064 I-45431 I-45361Options I-45360 27
B1078
Rev. Q
ITEM 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
DESCRIPTION CODE Screw Hexagon wood 8x75 DIN 571 VZN 97S37D-GM75 Screw M5x12 DIN 933 St. steel A2 97S11A-C512 Screw M10x25 DIN 933 St. steel A2 97S11A-D025 Washer M5 DIN 125 St. steel A2 97W11A-C5 Washer M10 DIN 125 St. steel A2 97W11A-D0 Washer Crinkle M5 97W6A-C5 Nut M10 DIN 934 St.steel A2 97N6A-D0 Nut M5 DIN 934 St. steel A2 97N6A-C5 Expansion Plug Fisher S12 97E7A-60 Al Section Bar 95K3A-24 Screw M5x10 DIN 933 St.steel A2 97S11A-C510
2.3 2.3.1
Mounting Procedure Floor Mounting

(see Fig. 2-1 and 2.2) A B Check that the rack position is in accordance with the Floor Plan drawing. Use the base mounting plate (item 7) as template for positioning the mounting bolts. One plate end shall refer to the rear rack side. Put marks, remove the base plate and bore the holes in the floor. Put the expansion plugs (item 19) in the holes and hammer gently in place. Replace the base plate, erect the rack and align it in the position on the base plate. Insert the screws (item 11) and washers (item 15) and tighten loosely. Adjust the four hexagon set screws in the base section to obtain a perpendicular position of the rack and tighten the fixing screws (item 11).
C D E
28
B1078
Rev. Q
2.3.2
Support of Rack Top

(See Fig. 2-3)
I Installation
A B
If the racks are installed against a wall, the previously mounted top brackets need to be secured to the wall as shown in Fig. 2-4. If the racks are installed away from a wall, extended support is needed. Mount a horizontal section bar (item 20) to the top brackets, along the rack row (See fig. 2-5). If side support is required, the section bar may be extended to a nearby wall and secured (see Fig. 2-6). Cut two section bars to required lenght and use bracket (item 6) assembly to fix them perpendicularly to the rack bar at both ends of the row and secure them to the wall behind. (See Fig. 2-3 and 2-6) .
2.3.3
Side Panels
(See Fig. 2-7) A Fix the spacer (item 3) to the rack top bracket at both ends of the rack row. B C Adjust the spacer by sliding in position (hook on a side panel (item 2) to check) and tighten the screw. As part of the side panel, at the bottom, there is a locking plate designed for left or right side mounting of panel. Break loose the locking plate by hand. Insert the screws (item 12) in the base section. Mount the locking plate, washers and nuts loosely. Hook on the side panel on the spacer (rack top) and put panel bottom in between rack-base and locking plate. Then tighten the bottom nuts.
B1078
Rev. Q
29
Fig. 2-1
Fig. 2-2 30
B1078 Rev. Q
Fig. 2-3
Fig. 2-4
B1078
Rev. Q
31
I Installation
Fig. 2-5
Fig. 2-6
32
B1078
Rev. Q
Fig. 2-7
B1078
Rev. Q
33
I Installation
2.4
Earthing
An earthing cable terminal of copper is located at the top left hand corner of the rack. This shall be connected to the main earthing point at the station by means of a 10 mm2 cable.
EARTHING TERMINATION
34
B1078
Rev. Q
3.0
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
I Installation
Drawing No. I-33464, Rev.A, gives an overview of the documents describing the external connections of the radio-relay equipment. The layout drawings show where the different units and connection panels are placed in the racks. Each individual unit has reference to a document which describes the signal information and the type and standard of the connectors used on the connection panels. Some of the units are optional. The documents "External Connections" and "Connection Panel" give the necessary information for the installation planner to provide mating connectors and cables, and prepare wiring lists for the installation. The documents "Monitor Connections" describe the monitor- and test points, and give information to provide cable assemblies for testing and service.
B1078
Rev. Q
35
0EV5$',25(/$<(48,30(17
1/)$0,/<
5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/Z63'LY ,5HY$
5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/ ,5HY$
5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/5(3 ,5HY$
5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/5(3Z63'LY ,5HY$
RACK LAYOUT CONNECTION PANELS I-46307 Rev. A
(;7(51$/&211(&7,216 &211(&7,213$1(/%$6(%$1' ,5HY$
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS SUPERVISORY & SUBINSERT I-33458 Rev. A
MONITOR CONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER I-33462 Rev. A
(;7(51$/&211(&7,216 '')3$1(/ ,5HY$
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS SERVICE TELEPHONE I-33459 Rev. A
(;7(51$/&211(&7,216 ,1',&$725&211(&7,213$1(/ ,5HY$
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ALARM ADAPTER UNIT I-33460 Rev. A
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS 64kb/s ADAPTER I-33461 Rev. A
Fig. 3-1
I-33464 Rev A DOCUMENT SURVEY EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
36
B1078
Rev. Q
INDICATOR CONNECTION PANEL
MCC270 DDF- PANEL
SPACE DIVERCITY CONTROLLER UNIT

PWR PROT PWR REG
SPACE DIVERCITY COMBINER UNIT HOT STANDBY CONTROLLER UNIT
16x2 Mb/s MUX/DEMUX or ALIGNMENT/SWITCH/HYBRID or SWITCH MATRIX UNIT at repeaters

BIT INS/EXT/ACU REG CHAN BIT INS/EXT/ACU PROT CHAN SVCE TELEPHONE SVCE TELEPHONE SUPERVISORY & SUBINSERT
Option
Fig. 3-2
I-46305 Rev A RACK UNIT LAYOUT TERMINAL 1+1 37
B1078
Rev. Q
I Installation
MODEM PROTECTION PWR BB PWR BB
TRANSCEIVER PROTECTION
TRANSCEIVER REGULAR
MODEM REGULAR
PWR SPACE DIVERSITY RECEIVER CH.2 MODEM COMBINER TRANSCEIVER CONTROL BD PWR SPACE DIVERSITY RECEIVER PROT MODEM COMBINER TRANSCEIVER CONTROL BD PWR SPACE DIVERSITY RECEIVER CH.1 MODEM CH.1 COMBINER TRANSCEIVER CH.1 CONTROL BD BIT INS/EXT, ACU CH.1 ADAPTER PWR SUPV, SUBINSERT BIT INS/EXT, ACU CH.2 CH.2 BIT INS/EXT, ACU PROT CH.1 PROT ADAPTER PWR PWR ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER PROT PWR SUBINSERT OMNIBUS EOW EXPRESS EOW ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER PWR CH.2 CH.2 PWR
I-46304 Rev A RACK UNIT LAYOUT TERMINAL 2+1 w/SPACE DIV.

ALIGN. SW & HYB, or 16x2Mb/s MUX/DEMUX * ALARM ADAPTER UNIT or 64kb/s ADAPTER or 2Mb/s ADAPTER OMNIBUS EOW & EXPRESS EOW HANDSET EOW ALARM ADAPTER UNIT or 64kb/s ADAPTER SUBINSERT
MCC270
MCC270
MCC270
SPACE DIVERSITY DELAY
ALARM ADAPTER UNIT or 64kb/s ADAPTER or POWER SUPPLY
Fig. 3-3
DDF- PANEL
* Choice Option
38
B1078
Rev. Q
DIR. 1
DIR. 2
INDICATOR CONNECTION PANEL MCC270 DDF- PANEL MCC270
HOT STANDBY SW CONTROL
HANDSET EOW
R A e v 4 6 I 3 0 6 A L Y O U T U N R A C K 1 + T E 1 M E A P N T A E R L I
ALIGN. SW & HYB, or 16x2Mb/s MUX/DEMUX, ADD/DROP SW MATRIX, or U-Link board *

BIT INS/EXT, ACU BIT INS/EXT, ACU EXPRESS EOW OMNIBUS EOW SUPV, SUBINSERT BIT INS/EXT, ACU BIT INS/EXT, ACU SUPV, SUBINSERT
OMNIBUS EOW & EXPRESS EOW ALIGN. SW & HYB, or 16x2Mb/s MUX/DEMUX, or ADD/DROP SW MATRIX *
ALARM ADAPTER UNIT or 64kb/s ADAPTER or 2Mb/s ADAPTER ALARM ADAPTER UNIT or 64kb/s ADAPTER
* Choice Option
Fig. 3-4
B1078
Rev. Q
39
I Installation
MODEM PROT PWR PWR PWR PWR
TRANSCEIVER CH.1 CH.1 ADAPTER ADAPTER
MODEM CH.1 PROT ADAPTER ADAPTER
TRANSCEIVER PROT PWR PWR
MODEM PROT PWR CH.1 PWR ADAPTER
TRANSCEIVER CH.1 ADAPTER
MODEM CH.1 PROT ADAPTER ADAPTER
TRANSCEIVER PROT
PWR SPACE DIVERSITY RECEIVER CH.2 MODEM COMBINER TRANSCEIVER CONTROL BD PWR SPACE DIVERSITY RECEIVER PROT ADAPTER ADAPTER COMBINER ADAPTER ADAPTER SUPV, SUBINSERT BIT INS/EXT, ACU PWR ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER CH.2 BIT INS/EXT, ACU COMBINER TRANSCEIVER CONTROL BD BIT INS/EXT, ACU CH.1 PWR SPACE DIVERSITY RECEIVER CH.2 MODEM COMBINER TRANSCEIVER CONTROL BD PWR PWR SPACE DIVERSITY RECEIVER PROT EXPRESS EOW ADAPTER ADAPTER COMBINER ADAPTER ADAPTER SUPV, SUBINSERT BIT INS/EXT, ACU CH.2 BIT INS/EXT, ACU COMBINER TRANSCEIVER CONTROL BD BIT INS/EXT, ACU CH.1 CH.1 ADAPTER CH.1 PROT CH.2 PWR ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER PWR TRANSCEIVER CONTROL BD PWR SPACE DIVERSITY RECEIVER CH.1 MODEM CH.1 PWR PROT MODEM PROT PWR OMNIBUS EOW SUBINSERT CH.2 CH.2 PWR CH.1 CH.1 PROT CH.2 PWR TRANSCEIVER CONTROL BD PWR SPACE DIVERSITY RECEIVER CH.1 MODEM CH.1 PWR PROT MODEM PROT PWR SUBINSERT CH.2 CH.2 PWR
DIR. 2
DIR. 1
MCC270
MCC270
MCC270
MCC270
MCC270
MCC270
5 3 0
ALARM ADAPTER UNIT or 64kb/s ADAPTER or 2Mb/s ADAPTER ALARM ADAPTER UNIT or 64kb/s ADAPTER or POWER SUPPLY ALIGN. SW & HYB, or 16x2Mb/s MUX/DEMUX or ADD/DROP SW MATRIX *
SPACE DIVERSITY DELAY
HANDSET EOW
SUBINSERT
DDF- PANEL
ALARM ADAPTER UNIT or 64kb/s ADAPTER OMNIBUS EOW & EXPRESS EOW
* Choice Option
INDICATOR CONNECTION PANEL ( Ref. Document I-33457 ) MCC270 DDF- PANEL ( Ref. Document I-33456 )
UWB320 CONNECTION PANEL, XCVR ( No external connections )
Q R e . v B 1 0 7 8
6 3 -g F R . i A e v 4 6 I 3 0 7 A Y O U L T K A C R A P N S L E O N N C E I T 1 4
CONNECTION PANEL, BASEBAND ( Ref. Document I-33454 ) SUPERVISORY & SUBINSERT ( Ref. Document I-33458 ) ENGINEERING ORDRE WIRE ( Ref. Document I-33459 ) 2Mb/s ADAPTER ( No external connections ) or 64kb/s ADAPTER ( Ref. Document I-33461 ) or ALARM ADAPTER UNIT ( Ref. Document I-33460 ) 64kb/s ADAPTER ( Ref. Document I-33461 ) or ALARM ADAPTER UNIT ( Ref. Document I-33460 ) UWB330 or UWB331
Option
ALARM OUT UNIT
Connector type: D-Sub 37 way female, DIN 41652
DDF - PANEL MCC270

SUPERVISORY & SUBINSERT
Pin No. ADAPTER 6 (Supervisory)
Pin No. Alarm output signal
ALARM ADAPTER UNIT
Pin No. Alarm input
64kb/s ADAPTER
Connector type: D-Sub 37 way female, DIN 41652 Pin No. Signal Connector type: D-Sub 37 way female, DIN 41652 Pin No. Signal Ch.1, G703
ADAPTER 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 (Note 1 & 2)
SERVICE TELEPHONE
1 1 1 1
SIC1 RI - Input SIC1 DO - Output SIC1 RI + Input SIC1 DO +Output
RS422
RS232 NEW-PC
37
37
37
2Mb/s
1
37 TRIB
37 37 TRIB
9
Network Interface 1 (Not available on Terminal - Repeater and Add Drop Repeater Dir.1)
2 10
Ch.2, G703
11
4 OUT
5
12 INP OUT
13
Network Interface 2 (Not available on Terminal - Repeater and Add Drop Repeater Dir.2)
INP
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B
Ch.1, V11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
GND FINT TX FINT RX NW1 RXD + NW1 RXD NW1 TXC + NW1 TXC NW1 TXD NW1 TXD + NW1 RXC NW1 RXC + NW2 RXD + NW2 RXD NW2 TXC + NW2 TXC NW2 TXD NW2 TXD + NW2 RXC NW2 RXC +
14 to 19 and 32 to 37 Not Used

6 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Ch.2, V11
7 15
OUTPUT 1 +Tx-alarm -Tx-alarm OUTPUT 2 +Rx-alarm -Rx-alarm OUTPUT 3 +Rx low input -Rx low input OUTPUT 4 +Mod. alarm -Mod. alarm OUTPUT 5 +Demod. alarm ch1 -Demod. alarm ch1 OUTPUT 6 +Demod. alarm ch2/P -Demod. alarm ch2/P OUTPUT 7 +LBER ch1 -LBER ch1 OUTPUT 8 +LBER ch2 -LBER ch2 OUTPUT 9 +Power supply alarm -Power supply alarm OUTPUT 10 +Switch alarm -Switch alarm OUTPUT 11 +AIS -AIS OUTPUT 12 +Test mode -Test mode OUTPUT 13 +Inp tributaries alm -Inp tributaries alm OUTPUT 14 +Outp tributaries alm -Outp tributaries alm OUTPUT 15 +Mux alm -Mux alm OUTPUT 16 +Remote demux alm -Remote demux alm GND GND GND GND GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
8
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 GND (Unit) GND (Unit) REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User)
SYNC 2Mb/s
CH1 CHP
16
PARITY ERROR
CH2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
34Mb/s CH1/CH2
OUT INP
TXD TXD + TXC + TXC RXD + RXD RXC + RXC TXD TXD + TXC + TXC RXD + RXD RXC + RXC TXD TXD + TXC TXC + RXD RXD + RXC RXC + TXD TXD + TXC TXC + RXD RXD + RXC RXC + BYTE1 BYTE1+ BYTE2 BYTE2 + GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
OUT
34Mb/s CHP
OUT INP
Bal. out 1 / unbal. out Bal. out 1 Bal. out 2 / unbal. out Bal. out 2 EOW out A bal. / unbal. EOW out B bal. 4W out A (bal.) / Optional ext. 4W out B (bal.) / Optional ext. 4W unbal. out / Optional ext. GND Bal. inp 1 / unbal. inp Bal. inp 1 GND GND Bal. inp 2 / unbal. inp Bal. inp 2 EOW inp A bal. / unbal. EOW inp B bal. 4W inp A (bal.) / Optional ext. 4W inp B (bal.) / Optional ext. 4W unbal. inp / Optional ext. GND 2W Telephone A 2W Telephone B E-wire GND M-wire GND Call inp GND Call out GND Control 1 (inp) Control 2 (out) Loudspeaker (out) Tip PABX Connections Ring
2Mb/s CH1/CH2
INP
2Mb/s CHP
OUT INP
NOTE 1: Dependent on actual configuration. NOTE 2: External 375kb/s serial bus future option. 4 (DIR.1) and 9 to 12 (DIR.2), are used. # With ADD/DROP SW MATRIX unit, only Trib. connectors 1 to Option
Q R e . v B 1 0 7 8
)
(DC + STANDARD CABLE FROM DC DISTRIBUTION +DC (Positive) is grounded! (DC -
8 3 -g F . C i O N S E R C X T A N A P D T O I L N E C T I4 e s u F 3
OPTION UWP2 is used only when -DC (Negative) is grounded
INDICATOR CONNECTION PANEL (EJK167A)
FUSE HOLDER ASSY UWP2 FUSE 3,15A (+48V)
EXTERNAL ALARM (TB5)

MAIN ALM Connector type: Terminal Block max 2.5mm
2
NO
H1 K1
COMMON
1 2 3 1 2 3 + 3 2 1 + 6 5 4
(GND)
TB5
NC NO
COMMON
EXTERNAL ALARM (TB4)

URGENT ALM Connector type: Terminal Block max 2.5mm
2
H2
TB4
NC
H3 K2
TB6
(GND)
DC INPUT POWER
20 - 60 V ( TB6)
2
Connector type: Terminal Block max 2.5mm
FUSE: 6.3A 250V 5x20mm Slow

FH1
CP2
CP1
L2
L1
TB2 1
MAIN ALM
2
1
DC OUTPUT
S1
GND
TB1 + + 1 4 2 5 3 6
URGENT ALM
2 3 TB3
GND
GND
J25 J26 J27 J28 J29
J30
CONNECTION PANEL, 16x2Mb/s BASEBAND UWB331 *

J31 J32 J33 J34
P1
S1
S2
P2
J1
J4
J7
J10
J13
J16
EXTERNAL POWER Note 1

Connector type: Mini D-Ribbon 20 way female, 3M 10220-6212VC or equivalent Pin No. Connector J36 1 GND 2 + 5V 3 + 5V 4 + 5V 5 + 5V 6 GND 7 - 5V 8 - 5V 9 GND 10 GND 11 + 11V 12 + 11V 13 GND 14 GND 15 - 11V 16 - 11V 17 GND 18 GND 19 GND 20 GND Note 1: Connection between baseband shelfs.
J2
J5
J8
J11
J14
9 4
375kb/s SERIAL BUS
Connector type: Mini D-Ribbon 20 way female, 3M 10220-6212VC or equivalent Pin No. Signal connector J35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 GND RMT RESET RCV GND GND GND DATA XMT + 375kb/s GND GND GND DATA XMT - 375kb/s GND GND GND DATA RCV + 375kb/s GND GND DATA RCV - 375kb/s ALM ADAPT EXT GND GND
J3 J6 J9 J12 J15 J17
J18
J19
J20
20
J21
J22
J23
K2
FL2
J35 J24
5 6 5 4 6 4 6 5
T B1 T B3 T B2
20
K1
TB3
TB2
TB1
FL1
J36
1 3 0 g F .1 i R A e v 3 4 5 8 O C N N X C T A L N U E R S T B & U I O S E R P V Y I4 Q R e . v B 0 7 8 5
SUPERVISORY & SUBINSERT

Connector type: D-Sub 25 way female, DIN 41652 Pin No. Signal connector J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 SIC1 RI SIC1 DO SIC1 RI + SIC1 DO + GND FINT TX FINT RX NW1 RXD + NW1 RXD NW1 TXC + NW1 TXC NW1 TXD NW1 TXD + NW1 RXC NW1 RXC + NW2 RXD + NW2 RXD NW2 TXC + NW2 TXC NW2 TXD NW2 TXD + NW2 RXC NW2 RXC + Input Output Input Output
J2
25
1 ( Connector top view )
RS422
J3
J4
RS232 O&M-PC
* * * * * * * *
* Not available on Terminal Repeater DIR.1 (including Add Drop Repeater).
J1
S1
S4
S3
SUPERVISORY & SUBINSERT (2KCN178B)
S902
P2
P1
SERVICE TELEPHONE
Connector type: D-Sub 37 way female, DIN 41652 Pin No. Signal connector J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Bal. out 1 / unbal. out Bal. out 1 Bal. out 2 / unbal. out Bal. out 2 EOW out A bal. / unbal. EOW out B bal. 4W out A (bal.) / Optional ext. 4W out B (bal.) / Optional ext. 4W unbal. out / Optional ext. GND Bal. inp 1 / unbal. inp Bal. inp 1 GND GND Bal. inp 2 / unbal. inp Bal. inp 2 EOW inp A bal. / unbal. EOW inp B bal. 4W inp A (bal.) / Optional ext. 4W inp B (bal.) / Optional ext. 4W unbal. inp / Optional ext. GND 2W Telephone A 2W Telephone B E-wire GND M-wire GND Call inp GND Call out GND Control 1 (inp) Control 2 (out) Loudspeaker (out) GND GND
37
J1
1
( Connector top view )
SERVICE TELEPHONE (2NF533A)
1 3 6
Q R e . v B 1 0 7 8
1 3 2 -g F .i R A e v 3 I 4 6 0 O C N S N X E C R T A L T U A L D M R T E P 7 4
ALARM ADAPTER UNIT

ALARM ADAPTER UNIT (2KN181A)
Pin No. Alarm input connector P2
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B
P1
( Connector bottom view )
32
1 P2 37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 GND (Unit) GND (Unit) REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User) GND (User)
64kb/s ADAPTER
64kb/s ADAPTER (2KN182A)
1 ,
G 7 0 3
2 ,
G 7 0 3
1 ,
V 1 1
P3
2 ,
V 1 1
( Connector bottom view )
1 J1 37
Pin No. Signal connector J1 1 TXD1 2 TXD1 + 3 TXC1 + 4 TXC1 C h . 5 RXD1 + 6 RXD1 + 7 RXC1 8 RXC1 9 TXD2 10 TXD2 + 11 TXC2 + 12 TXC2 C h . 13 RXD2 + 14 RXD2 15 RXC2 + 16 RXC2 17 TXD3 18 TXD3 + 19 TXC3 20 TXC3 + C h . 21 RXD3 22 RXD3 + 23 RXC3 24 RXC3 + 25 TXD4 26 TXD4 + 27 TXC4 28 TXC4 + C h . 29 RXD4 30 RXD4 + 31 RXC4 32 RXC4 + 33 BYTE1 34 BYTE1 + 35 BYTE2 36 BYTE2 + 37 GN D
A D 8
RCVR LVL VOLT

Connector type: JACK TIP (For test probe 2.0mm)
4J4 RF INP 4J5 RCVR LVL VOLT 4J3 RF OUT
ALM
T R A N S C E I V E R
M O D E M ALM
TRANSCEIVER
4J2 IF OUT 4J1 IF INP
5J2 IF INP 5J1 IF OUT
Q R e . v B 1 0 7 8
1 3 4 -g F .i R B e v 3 I 4 6 2 O C N S N M E O T R O N I V R E I C E R A T S 9 4
ITEM OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT SEE NOTE 1 SEE DETAIL 2 H = approx. 16 cm for position 30
DESCRIPTION
REMARKS
INDOOR EQUIPMENT
16 1
EXTERNAL CABLE CONNECTIONS H = approx. 37 cm for position 90
2
2.1
13 3 4
OPTION !
13.1
21 5 H 6
11.1
11.2
SEE NOTE 2 FOR ITEM 11 & 12 FOR ITEM 11 & 12 ( ADD 11.1 AND 11.2 ) NOTE 2 SEE NOTE 2 FOR 5 mm SCREW SEE NOTE 3
25 8 7
12
28
26
17
27 9
18
NL247 CONFIGURATION NL247 CONFIGURATION NL247 CONFIGURATION
MINIMUM REQUIRED FREE SPACE ON COLUMN : 125 cm
27.1
23
11.1 11.2
10 11 14 15 21
TO STATION EARTH NETWORK
13.1
19 13
24
10 sq. mm ( specify length ) 2 x 1,5 sq. mm ( specify length ) ( specify length ) L = 900 cm L = 900 cm L = 900 cm ( specify length) WALL MOUNTED. OPTION QTY 2 FOR EACH RACK.
W ALL RACK
22
29
OPTION
1 2 2.1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11.1 11.2 12 13 13.1 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 27.1 28 29 NOTE 1
COLUMN DIA. 115 mm ANTENNA DIA. 0,6 m MOUNTING KIT FOR ANTENNA WAVEGUIDE FLEX / TWIST WG SUSPENDER GASKET & SCREW KIT DRR BOX ( EQPT. HOUSING ) MOUNT. KIT FOR DRR BOX SUN SHIELD FOR DRR BOX TRANCEIVER WITH BRANCHING OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION UNIT CONNECTOR SHRINK BOOT SEALING COMPOUND CONNECTOR MULTICABLE 10 PAIRS 0,5mm CABLE ASSEMBLY EARTHING CONNECTOR CABLE CLAMP WALL FEED THROUGH OVERVOLT. PROT. ( INDOOR ) BB SHELF UNIT HANDSET SERV. CH. EQUIPMENT RACK 2m EARTHING CABLE POWER ( DC ) CABLE ALARM CABLE ADAPTER CABLE SERV. CH. CABLE SUPERVISORY CABLE COAX CABLE 16 x 2Mb/s COAX CONNECTOR EQUIPMENT RACK ( 1 m ) SIDE PANEL ( 2 m , for item 20 )
/ , / , $ 7 (
20
COLUMN
REQUIRED SPACE FOR OUTDOOR UNIT
EQUIPMENT SERVICE ACCESS TOP VIEW
$ 7 (
' '
35 cm
30
HINGED DOOR ( HALF DRR BOX )
AZIMUTH ANGLES OF DRR BOX RELATIVE TO ANTENNA POSITION SEE NOTE 1.
Type of tower mounted column depends on tower design and clamping device. Other columns, with diameter 76mm to 115mm, may be used. Notice the required space for service access to the equipment , see DETAIL 1 and 2: Design of self supporting column ( roof mounted ) depends on local conditions. The antenna can be positioned all way around the column, depending on service access and antenna direction. DETAIL 2 shows the maximum angles that the DRR Box can be turned relative to the position of the Antenna : 90 degrees (ccw) and 30 degrees (cw).
10 cm
NOTE 2
50 cm
90 NOTE 3
Field assembling of items 11 to 13 requires special crimping tool set. Tool kit parts, codes : M22520/1-01 AF8 , M22520/1-02 TH1A , MS24256A20 DAK20 , MS24256R20 DRK20 and Heat Gun . Alternative Item 13.1 is a pre - assembled cable with connectors in both ends. Length to be specified in cm. Cable clamp BR22 is used for cable ladder members, flat or round, up to 18 mm. Cable clamp BW22 is used for cable ladder members, angle, up to 40 mm.
0 M O
1 4 0
Fig. 4-2
1 M C . o e t 4 u a b n l S i t p l D F 4 2 A ( g p ) n r t . 8 e m 7 f K g e , h a t i l 2 5 8 n b 1 3 7 k h A i J o 1 h w 3 i A O o u r f d D s t o r U i n e c t 8 m 7 K e , r a l 2 s 5 t n 3 C 8 b k c 7 i e , 1 w o h J t C 2 i 3 s A i D c I o U d e c u e o d s r . m q s .5 m 0 , 5 s W r p 1 0 0 l 0 a A . T s o l B . C n h ( m e i p a f c 2 o p r a i k w u t e b 0 r s a , t e w l ) k r a f n , i s u e r . , A m Z H : T f g K B p i t o T 1 w h d l 3 i s t u o r i l T C & H o I t s r o C n l E d o c x . t 1 W 4 0 m . g u . , n I r u o t s n i c t s C . R p e r e c s h y d o t s n i f u l d e r : 4 3 ) g F C ( p i a e t b r l .C h s 1 a n c o h s b d w t p a l u r t n . .F b d 2 b k i . a v .I 3 y f e s a d s u ( d s p w u o t s l e a t i li m p e o h l s f ) a t d r .S 4 e n i c l g t I ( g i b u v i h e a i r . m 5 p r t w m o n r i a n o h l Q R e . v B 1 0 7 8 15
55mm Braid
Fig. 4-3
5mm
Sleeve or thread
Fig. 4-4
Adapter, straight
Braid-nut
2 Tool preparation and crimping (Fig 4-5 and 4-6) 1. Rotate selector knob to wire size 20 on hand crimping tool. 2. Release the trigger latch on turret head and set turret to position 20 (red). 3. Mount turret head onto the hand tool. Read the instructions en closed in tool pack. 4. Insert contact and prepared wire through the opening into turret. Press handles together until ratchet releases. Handle will return to open position and is ready for next contact.
Fig. 4-5
20
Fig. 4-6 3 Assembling of straight connector (Fig 4-6, 4-7, 4-8 and 4-9 1. See the connector pin configuration and prepare for insertion of contact pins into the connector housing. 2. Use inserting tool and place the contact pin in the u-tip of the tool butting against the contact main flange. Insert contacts one by one pushing straight in until the contact snaps into position and the clip ensures retention. 3. Slide the adapter-nut off the braid and onto the cable. 4. Slide the adapter off the braid and screw it onto connector housing. 5. Fold the braid over the adapter. Press the nut over the braid and turn it until 5 mm remains. 6. Cut the braid all way around in the 5mm slot and tighten the braid nut well. 52
B1078 Rev. Q
B A M C D
E P
M A B L L
K J K J H
N
V
N U
T V
P1 (male)
Fig. 4-7
1RWH
J1 (female)
View of rear side (cable contact insert)
Fig. 4-8
Fig. 4-9
&XWEUDLG
4 Prepare for shrinking (Fig 4-10 1. Wrap electrical tape around the braid. 2. Abrade the surface of cable at same length as of the boot using a 100-grade emery paper. 3. De-grease the area in and around the adapter groove using a suitable cleaning solvent. 4. The inside surface of the moulded boot is prepared with adhesive.
$EUDGHVXUIDFH
Fig. 4-10
&OHDQ
B1078
Rev. Q
53
I Installation
5 Shrinking of boot (Fig 4-11) 1. Use a heat-gun of at least 1400 watts. Start heating at the connector end applying the heat evenly until the lip of the moulded part is fully shrunk into the adapter groove. 2. Continue applying heat around and evenly towards the cable until the moulded part is fully recovered. Now, continue heating at the ends of boot for approx. 1 min. to ensure the adhesives are activated. 3. The assembled connector should be left for the adhesive to cure for 24 hrs at room temp.
Fig. 4-11
+27 $,5
PAIR 1 2 3 4 5
COLOUR WHITE BLUE WHITE ORANGE WHITE GREEN WHITE BROWN WHITE GREY
PIN R S T U G F N P E D
SIGNAL GND GND GND GND XMTR CH1 XMTR CH1 DC+ DCRCVR CH1 RCVR CH1
PAIR 6 7 8 9 10
COLOUR RED BLUE RED ORANGE RED GREEN RED BROWN RED GREY
PIN A M L K B C J H V
SIGNAL DC+ DC+ XMTR CH2 XMTR CH2 DCDCRCVR CH2 RCVR CH2 SPARE GND
Fig. 4-12
Colour Code
54
B1078
Rev. Q
4.2
Outdoor Mounted DRR Box

GASKET
BRANCHING
DRR-BOX
SHELF
GASKET
PROTECTIO N CIRCUIT
ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVE GASKET
Mounting: 4 mounting holes: Mounting to Column: Mounting Kit Code: Weight: Fully equipped: Material: Finish: Weather Proofing: Fig. 4-13
B1078 Rev. Q
M8 76 to 115 mm 3AB745A Cast Aluminium (AlSi12) White IP67 (Ref. IEC529)
55
I Installation
4.2.1
Measurements
SINGLE DIGITAL RADIO-RELAY BOX

264 mm
220 mm
A A-A
160 mm
INSIDE VIEW
97 mm
62.7 mm
Fig. 4-14 56
127 mm
32.8 mm
92 mm
393.2 mm
B1078
393.2 mm
645 mm
Rev. Q
4.3
Single DRR Box Mounted to Column
WASHER
NUT
TO BE REMOVED WITH A PAIR OF NIPPERS THREADED STUD
CLAMP
COLUMN 76 - 115 mm
COVER (SUN SHIELD) OPTION
COVER (SUN SHIELD) OPTION
Fig. 4-15
B1078
Rev. Q
57
I Installation
4.4
Waveguide Connection to DRR Box

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Waveguide Gasket Bi-metallic Shim Washer Lock, M4 Nut, M4 Screw, M4 Threaded Stud, M4 Washer, M4 Flexible Waveguide DRR Box Flange Sealing Compound
1 to 7 is Gasket/Screw Kit
Fig. 4-16 58
B1078 Rev. Q
A flexible waveguide is used between the DRR Box and the Antenna feed. The waveguide flange on top of the DRR box is made of aluminium. The flanges of the flexible waveguide are normally made of brass. Note 1 Waveguide flanges made of different materials such as aluminium and brass shall never be directly connected as galvanic corrosion will occur. A bimetallic shim must be inserted between the flanges. This shim has a copper surface at one side and aluminium on the other. Make absolutely certain that the aluminium side faces the aluminium flange. The bimetallic shim is part of Gasket/Screw Kit. Note 2 Use two alignment screws at the waveguide flange (short sides) in order to align the shim and mating the flange correctly to the flange of the DRR Box. Alignment screws are part of Gasket/Screw Kit. Note 3 Apply silicon sealing compound around shim edge and flange after mounting, to prevent any ingress of water. (Sealing compound is not part of the Gasket/Screw Kit.)
B1078
Rev. Q
59
I Installation
4.5
Outdoor Mounted Equipment

SEE ANTENNA SECTION FOR MOUNTING INSTRUCTION OF ANTENNA
FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE
MULTICABLE TO/FROM INDOOR MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
COLUMN 76 - 115 mm
Fig. 4-17 60
B1078 Rev. Q
Operators Guide
B1078
Rev. Q
61
II Operators Guide
sECTION II

62
B1078 Rev. Q
1.0
PREFACE
This manual describes how to operate the 16x2 or 34Mb/s Radio-Relay equipment and do simple cable connections, unit/circuit board replacements etc. As the equipment is an all indoor mounted type, these procedures are fairly simple. There are a limited number of cable connections normally used by the operators. The connections are fitted as required by customers. r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r External power supply connections External alarm connections External 34Mb/s main data connections External 2Mb/s insertion data connections External 64kb/s insertion data connections External Parity measurement connections External synchronization connections External Supervision system connections HandHeld Terminal / PC connections External Service Phone connections Service Phone handset connection External Alarm Adapter Unit connections Data interconnections between Bitinsert/extract and Modem IF interconnections between Transceiver and Modem RF interconnections between Transceiver and Branching unit
II Operators Guide
B1078
Rev. Q
63
2.0
BOARD/UNIT REPLACEMENT
When properly installed (see the installation procedure) the 34Mb/s equipment is very easy to maintain. However, a few things have to be observed: If a circuit board has to be removed from the shelf, check that all cable connectors on top or at the bottom of the board, if any, has been disconnected. Note! Never try to pull out a circuit board with the top or bottom connectors in place. When removing cable connectors, always do it very cautiously in order not to damage the board connectors. Fig. 2-1 shows the Coaxial Connectors on the top of the lower (baseband) shelf, while fig. 2-2 shows the Delta Connectors. When a cable connector is to be connected to the equipment, always do it very gently. When a circuit board is to be removed, use the board-ejector(s), if any, very gently. If a new circuit board is to be installed, observe that the board-ejectors are in line with the front of the board before it slides into position in the shelf, see fig. 2-3. This applies for all board positions in the lower shelf, (baseband shelf), except the leftmost in the lower part of the shelf. In this position the ejector must be angled to fit into the slot in the shelf. See fig. 2-4. Then as the board slides into position, gently push the ejector into a position in line with the front of the board. If the Transceiver or the Modem or both has to be removed, the power supply should be switched off before the units are removed. Note! Remember that the rightmost Power supply is used by the leftmost Transceiver and Modem and the leftmost Power supply is used by the rightmost Transceiver and Modem.
64
B1078
Rev. Q
If the Modem board in the top shelf, (Radio shelf), is to be removed, the Transceiver unit must be removed first, then the Modem can be pulled out, this circuit board however, has not the same board ejectors as the other boards but a shielding metal front, get hold of this front on top and bottom and pull out the board. A new board is inserted into the same position by holding the metal front in the same manner. When the transceiver is to be replaced, a torque wrench must be used to tighten the RF-connectors. Use a torque of 0.55Nm. Be careful not to damage the contact strips on the left hand side of the unit. When removing the power supply, be careful not to damage the contact strips on the right hand side of the unit.
CONNECTOR FOR SYNCHRONIZATION INPUT SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL SOURCE
CONNECTOR FOR SYNCHRONIZATION OUTPUT SIGNAL TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Fig. 2-1
Coaxial Connectors
B1078
Rev. Q
65
II Operators Guide
EXTERNAL SVCE CHANNEL CONNECTOR
SCADA AND NETWORK INTERF CONNECTOR
Fig. 2-2
Delta Connectors
BOARD EJECTOR CIRCUIT BOARD
SHELF
Fig. 2-3 66
Adapter in all but leftmost position

B1078 Rev. Q
ANGLE
CIRCUIT BOARD
BOARD EJECTOR
SHELF
SLOT
Fig. 2-4
Adapter in leftmost position
B1078
Rev. Q
67
II Operators Guide
3.0
3.1
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
Adapter Connections
Fig. 3-1 shows a 2Mb/s Insert Adapter using a coaxial connector in position 1, and a 64kb/s G.703/V.11 adapter using a delta connector in position 2. The Alarm Adapter is also using delta connector. The positions of the adapter boards in the shelf is not fixed and accordingly the boards may be placed in any of the positions 1 to 5. This applies for all adapters except the 2Mb/s Insert Adapters which are only located at the two leftmost positions. Position 6 is always used by the Power Supply.
2Mb/s Adapter
G703/V.11/ AAU Adapter
Fig. 3-1
Adapter in leftmost position
68
B1078
Rev. Q
3.2
Data Distribution Frame

Fig.3-2 shows the terminal connection while a Data Distribution Frame, (DDF) is used. This panel includes internal connections to all external connections to the terminal except those only situated on the front.
Fig. 3-2
B1078 Rev. Q
Terminal Connection using DDF panel 69
II Operators Guide
3.3
Front Connections
Fig. 3-3 shows the connection of the Service Telephone and the Hand Held Terminal (HHT). The connector for the HHT can also be used for a Personal Computer (PC connection).
Fig. 3-3 70
Front Connections
B1078 Rev. Q
3.4 3.4.1
Service Telephone Connection Selective Call Version

The Service Channel Interface Unit (SCI) is connected directly to the omnibus without switching. Therefore no signalling is necessary to be throughconnected. Once any telephone is off hook, it is connected. r Use of collective call When *-button or Call-button is pushed on any station, there will be a ringing signal in all telephones connected to the omnibus. The ringing will last as long as the button is held. Use of selective call The two digits has to be sent within approx. five seconds. If one of these digits is wrong, just wait for five seconds and then send two correct digits. The correct telephone will then ring in two periods of approx. one second. If a telephone has been reached with the selective number, a tone can be heared on the omnibus channel. External Loudspeaker The loudspeaker output is normally open on all stations. To mute all the speakers connected to the omnibus, lift off your telephone and press #. (This will also activate the Control 2 signal).
3.4.2
Collective Call Version

The Service Channel Interface Unit (SCI) is connected directly to the omnibus without switching. Therefore no signalling is necessary to be throughconnected. r Use of collective call When Call-button is pushed on any station, there will be a ringing signal on all SCIs connected to the omnibus. The ringing will last as long as the button is held. Use of speech controlled switch When the handset receptacle is unused, it is switched off in both send and receive directions by the speech controlled switch. To listen if there is any traffic going on the omnibus, one has to make a sound to open the switch. Once the switch is open it remains open appr. 10 seconds after there has been any sound in either send or receive direction. 71
B1078
Rev. Q
II Operators Guide
3.5
Parity Error Measurements

A coaxial connector for Parity Error Measurements is situated on the top of the Baseband connection panel, (see fig. 2-1). Check the front panel on the equipment for the exact location.When a pattern receiver is connected to the Parity Error connector it will momentarily show one error, this is because the output from the Parity Error driver is inverted. This means that the first error , shown on the pattern receiver, should be subtracted from the final result to get a correct measurement. Coaxial connectors for parity measurements are also situated at the DDF panel (see fig. 3-2).
3.6
External Insert Channel Synchronization

Two coaxial connectors are situated on the top of the Sub Insert boards, depending on which one used in the terminal (see fig. 2-1). The one at the very back is used to input an external, 2048kb/s synchronization signal to the Sub Insert Unit. This signal must only be applied at one terminal on a Radio-Relay section. That is, a system with more than two terminals. Coaxial connectors for synchrronization are also situated at the DDF panel (see fig. 3-2). See ITU-T rec. G.703 for signal specifications.
3.7
Synchronization of External Equipment to the Insert Channels

By using the 2048 kb/s synchronization signal from the foremost of the two coaxial connectors on top of the Supervisory & Subinsert Unit or the Subinsert Unit (see fig. 2-1). An external system/equipment can be synchronized to the insert channels of the terminal. See ITU-T rec. G.703 for signal specifications.
72
B1078
Rev. Q
3.8
Data Interconnection between the Radio and the Baseband Shelf

Fig. 3-4 shows the 37Mb/s interface between the radio and the baseband shelf in the 1+1 terminal. This interface can be disconnected but that is usually not necessary to do if only unit or board replacement shall be done. The figure also shows main data in/out and parity measurement connection.
Fig. 3-4
B1078 Rev. Q
Data and Clock Interconnection 73
II Operators Guide
3.9
2Mb/s Insertion Channel Interconnection

Fig. 3-5 shows the 2Mb/s insertion channel connection at the bottom of the baseband connection panel used for interconnecting the two terminals in a repeater. The same connector is also used on a terminal for N+0 systems not requiring protection for the 2Mb/s insertion channel. If protection is required, a dedicated 2Mb/s adapter which have an integrated connector is used, hence the connector on the connection panel is not used.
Bottom of baseband connection panel
J36
FL2 FILTER
FL1
RELAY
J35 K1 RELAY
K2
J24
TB3
375kb/s bus connector.
TB2
Power connector used to connect to another shelf.
TB1
DC power connections.
Coaxial cables
Main/Urgent alarm connection Connector lock. Press to release.
Channel 1 Channel P
Channel 2
2048kb/s insertion channel, interface.
Fig. 3-5 74
2048 kb/s Insertion Channel Interconnection

B1078 Rev. Q
FILTER
4.0
NL24x SYSTEM OPERATION

The following subchapters describe how to operate different parts of the NL24x equipment to obtain maximum performance. Subjects covered includes operating the main power switch and fuse on the Indicator & Connection Unit, connections at the Data Distribution Frame (DDF), front connections on the transceiver and modem units and use of switches on front of circuit boards normally shielded by the front covers on the baseband and radio shelves.
II Operators Guide
The last subchapters describe how to operate the 16x2 Mbit/s Multiplexer/Demultiplexer on terminals, and the Switch Matrix Board on add/drop repeaters. Fig. 4-1 shows a typical 1+1 terminal installation with unit placements etc. indicated.
B1078
Rev. Q
75
Fig. 4-1 76
1+1 Terminal, Typical Installation

B1078 Rev. Q
4.1
Indicator & Connection Unit

The Indicator & Connection Unit is situated at the top of the slimrack and includes Main Power switch and fuse, power on LED, (green), Main Alarm and Urgent Alarm LEDs, (red). Fig.4-2 shows the Indicator & Connection Unit including names on all parts.
Main Alarm Output connection
Urgent Alarm Output connection
Main Alarm LED
Main Alarm Input from baseband shelf
Urgent Alarm LED Urgent Alarm Input from baseband shelf DC Power ON LED
Main Fuse
DC power output
DC power input Main Power Switch
Fig. 4-2
Indicator & Connection Unit
B1078
Rev. Q
77
II Operators Guide
4.2
Data Distribution Frame

The Data Distribution Frame, (DDF), is situated at the top of the slim rack and includes all external data connections to the NL24x equipment. Each connector on the DDF is named in order to simplify use of the equipment as shown in fig. 4-3.
Connections to Adapters
Connection to Supervisory Unit or Adapters
Data input/output used by Switch Matrix on repeaters
Data iput/output used by 16x2Mbit/s Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
Sync. in/out to Subinsert Unit 34Mbit/s data input/output Ch1/Ch2 2Mbit/s wayside Ch1/Ch2
Parity Error outputs Ch1, ChP, Ch2 34Mbit/s input/output occasional traffic, ChP 2Mbit/s wayside ChP
Fig. 4-3
DDF Panel
78
B1078
Rev. Q
4.3
Front Connections on Transceiver and Modem

The Transceiver Unit has connectors for input/output of RF and IF signals on the front. A separate output for RF-input level voltage is also supplied. This is the same voltage which is available trough the Supervision system, accessible on the Hand Held Terminal, (HHT) (the operation of the HHT is described in chapter 5.0) and can be monitored by a multimeter. Each Transceiver and connected Modem are powered by a separate power supply. This makes it possible to switch off only one Transceiver/Modem combination without disturbing the other Channel in a 1+1 or 2+1 system. When monitoring the RF input level, ground connection for the multimeter can be found below the upper grip of the radio shelf. Fig. 4-4 shows the front of the Transceiver unit. Each connector and alarm LED is named to simplify user operation.
Fig. 4-4
B1078 Rev. Q
Transceiver Unit 79
II Operators Guide
4.4
Operation of Switches on the Fronts of the Circuit Boards

This subchapter describes how the switches on the front of each circuit board are operated and their functionality. Remember that the front cover on the proper shelf has to be removed prior to operating any switches. A standard Frequency Diversity terminal or repeater have no circuit boards in the radio shelf with switches at the front. A Hot Standby terminal or repeater however, has the Hot Standby Switch Control board in the lower part of the radio shelf with a switch at the front which may be operated to lock the transmission to one of the XMTRs. This circuit board is shown in fig. 4-5. Space Diversity Terminals have a Space Diversity Controller Board with a lock switch on the front. This switch has three positions; Main, Auto and Space which means locked to either Main RCVR, Space RCVR or in Auto mode which is the normal operating position. This circuit board is shown in fig. 4-6.
Fig. 4-5
Hot Standby Control Board
Fig. 4-6 80
Space Diversity Controller Board

B1078 Rev. Q
All terminals and repeaters includes the Bitinsert/Extract/ACU Board which have three different switches on the front. These are used for manual control of the XMTR-switch and PRBS-insertion. This circuit board is shown in fig. 4-7.
Fig. 4-7
Bit Insert/Extract/ACU Board
B1078
Rev. Q
81
II Operators Guide
All N+1 34Mbit/s terminals and repeaters includes the Alignment/Switch/ Hybrid Board. This board has one switch on the front, used for manual control of the switch function on the receive side. The circuit board is shown in fig. 4-8.
Fig. 4-8
Alignment Switch Hybrid Board
82
B1078
Rev. Q
All N+1 16x2Mbit/s terminals includes the Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Board. This board has one switch on the front, used for manual control of the switch function on the receive side. The circuit board is shown in fig. 4-9.
Fig. 4-9
16x2 Mb/s Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Board
B1078
Rev. Q
83
II Operators Guide
All 16x2 Mbit/s add/drop repeaters normally include the Switch Matrix Board. This board has two switches on the front, used for manual control of the switch function on the receive side in each direction independent of each other. The circuit board is shown in fig. 4-10.
Fig. 4-10
Switch Matrix Board
84
B1078
Rev. Q
4.5
Use of Switch Matrix Board on Add/Drop Repeaters

Each Switch Matrix Board is designed as a repeater with complete alignment and protection switching for both directions independent of each other. It is preferable to use the Switch Matrix Board on all Add/Drop Repeaters because of its flexibility, although two 16x2Mb/s Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Boards could have been used, one in each terminal on the repeater. Using the 16x2Mb/s Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Board is, however, a more expensive and less flexible option because this solution requires two circuit boards instead of one, and has no possibility to control the Add/ Drop Channels from the Supervision system. When using the Switch Matrix Board on Add/Drop Repeaters, it is a simple matter to add or drop one or more channels of the totally 16 available for each radio channel in the NL24x system. Each Switch Matrix Board is capable of adding/dropping a maximum of four 2Mb/s channels. If more channels are necessary to add or drop, another Switch Matrix Board is added to increase the maximum to eight channels. The equipment allows for a total of 2 Switch Matrix Boards. When a 2Mb/ s channel is dropped in one direction, the same 2Mb/s channel is empty in the other direction and can be supplied with data as required by the user. By using extra inputs/outputs as shown in fig. 4-11, the Switch Matrix Board is capable of handling the other direction as well. 2Mb/s channels that are not dropped are connected straight through the board. To control which of the 16 channels to be dropped or added, use the Hand Held Terminal (HHT) as described in OPERATORS GUIDE FOR HAND-HELD TERMINAL . Fig. 4-11 shows a simplified block diagram of the Switch Matrix Board.
B1078
Rev. Q
85
II Operators Guide
86 Fig. 4-11 Block Diagram, Switch Matrix Board

34.368Mb/s Ch R Dir 1 34.368Mb/s Ch P Dir 1 34.368Mb/s Ch R Dir 1 34.368Mb/s Ch P Dir 1
375kb/s bus
ACU Alignment/ Switch Hybrid Splitter

34.368Mb/s Ch R Dir 2 34.368Mb/ Ch P Dir 2 34.368Mb/s Ch R Dir 2 34.368Mb/s Ch P Dir 2
Hybrid Splitter
Switch Matrix Dir 1
Switch Matrix Dir 2
Alignment/ Switch
Interface Dir 1
R = Regular Channel P = Protection Channel
Interface Dir 2
B1078 Rev. Q
4x2.048kb/s
Add/Drop Channels
4x2.048kb/s
Add/Drop Channels
4.5.1
Adding/Dropping Maximum 4 Channels

When dropping a maximum of four 2Mb/s channels, only one Switch Matrix Board is needed as shown in fig. 4-12. The Switch Matrix Board is then inserted in the Direction 1 terminal at the repeater and another circuit board called U-Link Board is inserted in the Direction 2 terminal. The U-link Board is used only for rerouting the baseband data in that terminal. As the figure shows, data on the left hand part of the DDF-panel is from direction 1 to direction 2 while data on the right hand part of the DDF-panel is from direction 2 to direction 1. The DDF-panel in the Direction 2 terminal is not used.
II Operators Guide
Dir.1
1/[5HSHDWHU
Dir.2
SWITCH MATRIX BOARD
U-LINK BOARD
34.368Mbit/s Interconnection cable
DDF-panel Dir. 1
DDF-panel Dir. 2
Direction 1 terminal
Fig. 4-12
B1078 Rev. Q
Adding/Dropping of Four 2 Mb/s Channels 87
4.5.2
Adding/Dropping Maximum 8 Channels

When dropping a maximum of eight 2Mb/s channels, two Switch Matrix Boards are needed as shown in fig. 22. One Switch Matrix Board is inserted in the Direction 1 terminal and the other in the Direction 2 terminal. As the figure shows, data on the left hand part of the DDF-panel in the Direction 1 terminal is from direction 1 to direction 2, while data on the right hand part of the DDF-panel in the Direction 1 terminal is from direction 2 to direction 1. The data on the left hand part of the DDF-panel in the Direction 2 terminal is from direction 2 to direction 1 while data on the right hand part of the DDFpanel in the Direction 2 terminal is from direction 1 to direction 2.
Dir. 1
NL24x, 1+0/1+1 Repeater
Dir. 2
SWITCH MATRIX BOARD
SWITCH MATRIX BOARD 34.368Mbit/s interconnection cable
DDF-panel Dir.1
DDF-panel Dir.2
Fig. 4-13 88
Adding/Dropping of Eight 2 Mb/s Channels

B1078 Rev. Q
4.5.3
Adding/Dropping on 2+0 or 2+1 Repeaters

To add or drop 2Mb/s channels on 2+0 or 2+1 repeaters, the Direction 1 terminal in the repeater requires one Switch Matrix Board for each radio channel. That is sufficient to add or drop a maximum of four 2Mb/s channels for each radio channel. To add or drop a maximum of eight 2Mb/s channels for each radio channel, requires two Switch Matrix Boards in each terminal in the repeater.
Dir. 1
NL24x, 2+0/2+1 Repeater
Dir. 2
SWITCH MATRIX BOARD
SWITCH MATRIX BOARD
U-LINK BOARD
U-LINK BOARD
34.368Mbit/s interconnection cable Chan 1 34.368Mbit/s interconnection cable Chan 2
DDF-panel Dir. 1 Channel 1
Fig. 4-14
Adding/Dropping of Four 2 Mb/s Channels on 2+0/2+1 Repeater 89
B1078
Rev. Q
II Operators Guide
If required, it is possible to add or drop 2Mb/s channels on only one of the radio channels while the other one is acting as an ordinary 34Mb/s channel. This is done by using an Alignment Switch Hybrid Board to replace each Switch Matrix Board and U-Link Board for the 34Mb/s channel, see fig. 4-14. That option is not shown in a figure, but in short terms it will use the 34Mb/s input/output in the lower part of the DDF-panels instead of the 2Mb/s inputs/outputs in the middle. Fig. 4-14 illustrates adding/dropping of maximum four 2Mb/s channels on 2+0/2+1 repeaters Fig. 4-15 illustrates adding/dropping of maximum eight 2Mb/s channels on 2+0/2+1 repeaters.
Dir. 1
NL24X, 2+0/2+1 Repeater
SWITCHDir. 2
SWITCH MATRIX BOARD
SWITCH MATRIX BOARD
SWITCH MATRIX BOARD
SWITCH MATRIX BOARD
34.368Mbit/s Interconnection cable Channel 1 34.368Mbit/s Interconnection cable Channel 2
Fig. 4-15 90
Adding/Dropping of Eight 2 Mb/s Channels on 2+0/2+1 Repeater

B1078 Rev. Q
5.0
5.1
OPERATORS GUIDE FOR HAND HELD TERMINAL (HHT)

General Description
The Hand Held Terminal (HHT) provides the user interface to the 34 Mb/s radio-relay terminal internal supervisory system. The HHT is designed for simple field maintenance and configuration of the transmission system during installation, setup and commissioning.
II Operators Guide
The HHT allows you to see alarm status/indications, performance measurements and other equipment parameters. All these operations can be performed locally or remotely. Note: The HHT display features are dependant of Supervisory Unit (SU) software versions, see Appendix 1 (in this section). The HHT is equipped with 28 keys and an LCD display with 4 lines of 20 characters. Fig. 5-1 shows the HHT connected to the SU.
B1078
Rev. Q
91
6XSHUYLVRU\6\VWHP 0EV 0DVWHU7HUPLQDO 5$
++7
F1 F5
F2 F6
F3 F7
F4 F8
ESC 7 4 1 DEL 0 8 5 2 . 9 6 3 -
ENTER
EXP
Note! The HHT will display the system configuration of the actual radio equipment. E.g. 1+1 Master Terminal Fig. 5-1 Hand Held terminal (HHT) connected to the Radio-Relay Equipment
92
B1078
Rev. Q
5.1.1
Technical Data
Display: Keyboard: Serial Interface: - electrical levels - transmission rate 120 columns * 32 rows of Pixels giving 4 lines of 20 character 28 keys V.24, RS-232 9600 bit/s 8 data 1 stop even parity 5V, supplied from the host computer, Supervisory Unit (SU) 156 mm 82 mm 35 mm 250 g -20 OC to 55 OC 0OC to 50 OC
Power supply: Mechanical dimensions: - height - width - depth - weight Temperature: - storage - operating
5.1.2
Hardware Connection
The HHT is connected directly to the Supervisory Unit (SU) via a cable with ISDN male connectors in both ends. Fig.5-2 shows the connection and pin description between the HHT and the Supervisory Unit.
GND TXD (From SU) RXD (To SU) NC HHT (Connect status) CTS (Clear to send) RTS (Ready to send) VCC (+5V)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SU
Fig. 5-2
B1078 Rev. Q
HHT
Cable Connection SU-HHT 93
II Operators Guide
5.2 5.2.1
Functional Description Key Functions

The keyboard layout is shown in Fig. 5-3. The keys F1 to F8 are function keys for quick selection of different sub menus. See table 5-1; Menu System, for description of the different menus.
Configuration Sec: x Sta: x Intu: x Connected: 0xnnnn Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)

++7
F1
F2
F6
F3
F4
F5
F7
F8
ESC 7 4 1
DEL 0
ENTER 8 5 2 .
9
6 3
EXP
Fig. 5-3
94
B1078
Rev. Q
The ESC key is used for moving to previous state/menu.
Supervisory System
[0EV
Master Terminal
5$
++7
F1
F2
F6
F3
F4
F5
4F
F7
F8
ESC 7 4 1
DEL 0
ENTER 8 5 2 .
9
6 3
EXP
Fig. 5-4
The Enter key is used for: - Selecting current menu in Main Menu - Changing parameters - Changing Sta, Sec or Intu address
Security Sec: x Sta: x Intu:x Connected: 0xnnnn Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
++7
F1 F5 F2 F3 F7 F4 F8
F6
ESC
ENTER
7
4
8
5
9
6
2 .
DEL
EXP
Fig. 5-5
B1078
Rev. Q
95
II Operators Guide
The DEL key is used for deleting the last entry from the keyboard.
Configuration Sec: x Sta: x Intu: x Passw(2): xxxx Input password
++7
F1
F2
F6
F3
F4
F5
F7
F8
ESC 7
4
ENTER 8
5 9 6
1
DEL 0
2 .
3
EXP
Fig. 5-6
The - arrow keys are used for moving between command entry lines, and the - arrows keys are used for decrementing and incrementing respectively the command entry number.
Main menu Sec: x Sta: x Intu: x Connected: 0xnnnn Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
++7
F1
F2
F6
F3
F4
F5
F7
F8
ESC 7 4 1
DEL 0
ENTER 8 5 2 .
9
6 3
EXP
Fig. 5-7
96
B1078
Rev. Q
The number keys are input parameters for the selected command
Configuration Sec: 1 Sta: 1 Intu: 0 Passw(1): Input password.
++7
F1
F2
F6
F3
F4
F5
F7
F8
ESC 7 4 1
DEL 0
ENTER 8 5 2 .
9
6 3
EXP
Fig. 5-8
B1078
Rev. Q
97
II Operators Guide
5.2.2
Display Layout
The information on the display is presented on four lines where each line has a specific meaning.
6HF
&RQILJXUDWLRQ
6WD,QWX
&RQQHFWHG[QQQQ
8VH(6&(17(5
Line 1 of the display shows the selected menu. The second line is used to select and display station address within the network and internal unit on that station. Line 3 of the display is used to access the individual parameters on the station. Line 4 on the display gives information, help or error messages for the current operation. The HHT has four input fields: Sec: x The section number of the selected station. Range 1 - 128. Sta: x The station number of the selected station. Range 1 - 16. Intu: x Internal unit number of the selected station. Range 0 - 13. Parameter name: Parameter Value. The actual parameter accessed.
98
B1078
Rev. Q
5.2.2.1
Menu System
6HF 6WD ,QWX
&RQILJXUDWLRQ

<=
Selected Menu
&RQQHFWHG[QQQQ
8VH(6&(17(5
The menu system contains 6 sub menus which are selected using the HHT function keys, F1 - F8, or via the main menu. The sub- menus are:
II Operators Guide
HHT Function Key F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Configuration Security Fault Quality Test Main Menu Start Up/ Introduction Picture F8 Password Setting Display/Change passwords parameters Display equipment information and resets password access level Display/Change configuration parameters on station Display/Change protection switching and AIS insertion parameters Alarms, Metering and remote control parameters System Performance Data and Error Pulse parameters Looping, PRBS insertion, PRBS/CRC-4 check Menu Tex Description
Table 5-1
Menu System
The description of parameters available in each menu is found in the following chapters.
5.2.2.2
Station and Unit Address
6HF 6WD ,QWX
&RQILJXUDWLRQ

<=
Station and Unit Address
&RQQHFWHG[QQQQ
8VH(6&(17(5
B1078
Rev. Q
99
The station and unit address specifies which station and internal unit the operator of the HHT communicates with. When a selected station is not present or reachable in the network, the parameter field, line 3 of the display, will be blank. Selecting an internal unit that is not present on the station will result in the help text (not connected) being displayed on the HHT. The unit address consists of one station address part, Sec and Sta, and one internal unit part, Intu.
& 6(
68
/,1.$
7(50,1$/
$'''523 5(3($7 (5
/,1.$
7(50,1$/ 68 6(&
6(&
$ . 1 , / $ . 1 , /
1, 1(7$ 1(7%
$ . 1 , /
1(7%
$ . 1 , /
NI
68 6(&
68
68
68
1(7$ 1,
NET A
7(50,1$/
1(7$
NI
1(7%
68
$ . 1 , /
$ . 1 , /
68
1(7%
7(50,1$/
68
/,1.$
7(50,1$/
& ( 6
/,1.$
1,1HWZRUN,QWHUIDFH 686XSHUYLVRU\8QLW
68
7(50,1$/
Fig. 5-9
Example of Network Configuration
5.2.2.2.1
Section Address (Sec:)

This number specifies the section address within the network. The address range is from 1 - 128. Within a network any section can be accessed by changing the section address, See fig. 5-9. The section address on a station is set using the HHT, see para 5.3.1.9.
5.2.2.2.2
Station Address (Sta:)

Within each section each station is given a station address. The address range is from 1 to 16. The Terminal Master must have address 1 and the Terminal Slave must have the highest station address in the section. The station address is set with hardware switches on the supervisory unit, 2KCN178B, DIL-switch S1, see Section III, Configuration.
100
B1078
Rev. Q
5.2.2.2.3
Internal Unit Address (Intu:)

The internal unit command field is used to select which internal unit to display or change parameters on. The table below shows the address of the internal units. Internal Unit Number 0 1-7 8-10 11 12-13 Internal Unit Name SU AAU BIT ACU MUX ACU SWM ACU Table 5-2 Description Supervisory Unit Alarm Adapter Unit Alarm Collection Unit on Bit Insert/Extract unit Not used Alarm Collection Unit on Mux/Demux unit Alarm Collection Unit on Switch Matrix unit
Internal Unit Addresses
The following table shows the Internal unit numbers for the ACUs in the different radio system configurations: Radio System Configuration 1+0 1+1 2+0 Internal Unit Number 9 12 (16x2 Mb/s system) 8 9 12 (16x2 Mb/s system) 8 9 12 (16x2 Mb/s system) 13 (16x2 Mb/s system) 8 9 10 12 (16x2 Mb/s system) 13 (16x2 Mb/s system) 8 9 10 Radio Channel Ch1 Ch1 ChP Ch1 Ch1/ChP Ch2 Ch1 Ch1 Ch2 ChP Ch1 Ch2 Ch1/ChP Ch2/ChP Ch2 Ch1 Ch3
2+1
3+0
Table 5-3
B1078 Rev. Q
ACU Internal Unit Addresses in different systems 101
II Operators Guide
Internal unit number 11 is not used. After power up or after pressing F7, the HHT will display Intu: 0, selecting the SU as the internal unit. In addition the section and station address will be set to the local station address.
5.2.3
Parameter Access
6HF 6WD ,QWX
&RQILJXUDWLRQ

&RQQHFWHG[QQQQ
<= Parameter Name/number: Param. Value
8VH(6&(17(5
The parameter information field consists of two parts: Parameter Number Parameter Value The parameter number (also called item number) determines which item the operator is accessing on the selected internal unit. The parameter value gives the value, information or status for the selected parameter. All parameters can be read on the HHT. Some parameters can be written, and these are password protected. In the following chapters, the parameters are described. Parameters not described are for internal use only.
5.2.4
Information Text Field
6HF 6WD ,QWX
&RQILJXUDWLRQ

<= Information or Response Text
&RQQHFWHG[QQQQ
8VH(6&(17(5
Line 4 on the HHT displays help text. The information displayed on the HHT is dependant of selected internal unit and parameter number and current operation. The following help messages are available:
Help Text ACU(101-): AAU(101-): ACU(101-): NO ALARMS ACU(101-): ALM! Description Indicates from which parameter number on the ACU or AAU the alarm information can be found. Indicates that the selected unit reports no alarms. Indicates that the selected unit reports at least one active alarm. USE 0-9 (ESC) (ENTER) Keys available during current operation. Input Password Password Required. Change param no. Specify new parameter number. Change Parameter Specify new parameter value. Change Intu: Specify new internal unit number Change Sec: Specify new Section number Change Sta: Specify new Station number
Table 5-4 102
Help Messages
B1078 Rev. Q
If an incorrect parameter is entered, an audible alarm is activated and an error message is displayed. The messages and their explanation are shown in table below:
Error message Value out of range! Param not writable! Param doesn't exist! Param has no access! Error while writing! Unit is not present! Wrong access level! Not implemented yet! Wrong password! Description Parameter input is not valid Parameter is read-only Parameter number is not defined Wrong menu is selected Parameter is not written Internal Unit is not connected Password level is too low Function is not available Password is not right
Table 5-5
Error Messages
5.2.5
Start Up, Introduction Picture

When the start-up menu is displayed, information from the local station is shown. The information displayed about the system configuration on the station is based on DIL-switch settings on the supervisory unit (SU). In addition the software revision code is shown.
6XSHUYLVRU\6\VWHP [0EV 0DVWHU7HUPLQDO 5$
System Type Station Type Software revision
B1078
Rev. Q
103
II Operators Guide
5.2.5.1
System Type Line2:

Line 2 on the HHT display shows the type of station that is configured on the SU. It also displays an error message if the SU is illegally configured. The following system types are defined:
6\VWHP7\SHWH[W
1+0 34Mb/s 1+1 34Mb/s 2+0 34 Mb/s 1+0 16x2 Mb/s 2+0 16x2 Mb/s 1+1 16x2Mb/s Hot Standby 34 Mb/s Hot Standby 16x2 Mb/s 2+1 34 Mb/s 2+1 16x2 Mb/s 3+0 34 Mb/s 2+1 34 / 16x2 Mb/s 2+1 16x2 / 34 Mb/s 1+0 Sp. Div. 34 Mb/s 1+1 Sp. Div. 34 Mb/s 2+0 Sp. Div. 34 Mb/s 1+0 Sp. Div. 16x2 Mb/s 2+0 Sp. Div. 16x2 Mb/s 1+1 Sp. Div. 16x2 Mb/s 2+1 Sp. Div. 34 Mb/s 2+1 Sp. Div. 16x2 Mb/s 3+0 Sp. Div. 34 Mb/s 2+1 Sp. Div. 34 / 16x2 Mb/s 2+1 Sp. Div. 16x2 / 34 Mb/s 1+0 Split Mount 34Mb/s 1+1 Split Mount 34Mb/s 2+0 Split Mount 34 Mb/s 1+0 Split Mount 16x2 Mb/s 2+0 Split Mount 16x2 Mb/s 1+1 Split Mount 16x2Mb/s Hot Stby Split 34Mb/s Hot Stby Split 16x2Mb/s Not Implemented
Table 5-6
System Types
"Not Implemented" is shown when a system type is set on the SU which is not implemented in actual software version (see separate description for 2KCN178B). 104
B1078 Rev. Q
5.2.5.2
Station Type Line3:

Line 3 on the HHT display shows the type of station that is configured on the supervisory unit. It also displays an error message; Illegal Settings, if the supervisory unit is illegally configured. The following station types are defined: Station Type Text Master Terminal Slave Terminal Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 Illegal Settings*
* is displayed if the SU has illegal settings.
Table 5-7
Station Types
B1078
Rev. Q
105
II Operators Guide
5.3
Configuration Menu (F1)

The configuration menu is selected by pressing the [F1] button.
Configuration Sec: x Sta: x Intu: x Connected: 0xnnnn Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
5.3.1
SU Configuration Parameters
SU configuration parameters are defined in the table below.
,QSXW 3DUDPHWHU 5: 'LVSOD\WH[WOLQH 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 (R) 1 (R/W) 2 (R/W)
Equipment: NL24x NL_Code: xxx Serial_No.: xxxxxx Connected:0xn 0xn3 Connected: nn2 nn1 n n0 3 2 1 0 System Type: xxx No AAUs: x SIC1 Type: x Stationno: xx Sectionno: xx Space Div: x NetA_SU: xx NetA_SEC: xxx NetB_SU:xx NetA_SEC: xxx Bypass_352: ENABLED RmtReset: x SetClock: x SUs in Sec: xx
Shows type of 34/16x2 equipment NL code Serial no
8 (R)
n3n2 n2n1 n1n0 n0 displays which units are n3 connected to the SU internal bus, ref. Table Table 5-11 5-11 ref.
Display system number of station. Number of AAUs in the station. Sets serial configuration for SIC1 serial port. Shows station number Section number Set to 1 if station has Space Diversity SU address of connected station on network port A Section address of connected station on network port A SU address of connected station on network port B Section address of connected station on network port B Enables/disables Bypass 352 function Remote reset of station to the left and/or right of station. Clock setting in section and network. Number of stations in this section.
10 (R) 11 (R/W) 15 (R/W) 16 (R) 17 (R/W) 18 (R/W) 20 (R/W) 21 (R/W) 22 (R/W) 23 (R/W) 24 (R/W) 25 (R/W) 26 (R/W) 29 (R)
Table 5-8 106
SU Parameters (continues)
B1078 Rev. Q
,QSXW 3DUDPHWHU 5: 'LVSOD\WH[WOLQH 'HVFULSWLRQ
30 (R) 31 (R/W) 32-47 (R/W) 48 (R) 52 (R/W) 53 (R/W) 54 (R/W) 55 (R/W) 56 (R/W) 57 (R/W) 58 (R/W) 59 (R/W) 100-211 (R/W) 214 (R/W) 215 (R/W) 237 (R/W) 240 (R/W) 241 (R/W)
Set in Net: xx NetToBackp: x Section_1: xx Section_16: xx Elapsedms: xx xx:xx:xx Second Minute Hour Weekday Day Month Year Century Section_17: xx Section_128: xx PC/HHT Baud PC/SIC Baud SW-Release: xxx NetAConfig NetBConfig
Number of sections in the network Configuration of network port in backplane on add/drop repeater Network configuration Elapsed time since reset of processor. Wraps around every 50 days. Current time: Seconds Current time: Minute Current time: Hour Current time: Day of week Current time: Day Current time: Month Current time: Year Current time: Century Network configuration Baud rate selection for PC/HHT port Baud rate selection for PC/SIC port The software revision on the unit Baud rate selection for NetA port Baud rate selection for NetB port
Table 5-8
SU Parameters (continued)
5.3.1.1
Equipment (SU param 0)

This parameter displays the type of 34/16x2 Mb/s equipment. The parameter can have the following values: Equipment parameter Description NL24x Nera 34/16x2 Mb/s radio relay equipment NF34 Nera 34/16x2 Mb/s fiber optical equipment NS400 Nera 16x2 Mb/s multiplexer equipment Table 5-9 Equipment
B1078
Rev. Q
107
II Operators Guide
5.3.1.2
NL Code (SU param 1)

This parameter displays the Nera NL Code for the radio equipment, if entered. The parameter can have the following values:
1/B&RGH SDUDPHWHU 'HVFUL SWL RQ
241 242 243 245 247 248
7 GHz 5 GHz 2 GHz 8 GHz 15 GHz 13 GHz
Table 5-10
NL_Code
5.3.1.3 5.3.1.4
Serial Number (SU param 2)

This parameter displays the serial number if entered.
Display Units Connected (SU param 8) This parameter displays which units (SU/ Configuration ACU/AAU) that are connected to the in- Sec: 1 Sta: 1 Intu: 0 ternal serial bus. Connected: 0xn3n2n1n0 The values n - n in the Connected: Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
field are defined as follows:
3 0
HEX value Unit Connected Unit no Binary Description SU 0 0/1 n0 AAU1 1 0/1 AAU2 2 0/1 AAU3 3 0/1 AAU4 4 0/1 n1 AAU5 5 0/1 AAU6 6 0/1 When a unit is AAU7 7 0/1 connected, this ACU CHP/CH2* 8 0/1 is represented n2 ACU CH1 9 0/1 by a bit set to ACU CH2/CH3* 10 0/1 1. Not used 11 0/1 MUX ACU1 or SWM ACU1 12 0/1 n3 MUX ACU2 or SWM ACU2 13 0/1 Not used 0/1 Not used 0/1 *CH2; N+0 systems Table 5-11 Units Connected to SU 108
B1078 Rev. Q
5.3.1.5
System Type (SU param 10)

This parameter shows the system type number that is distributed to the connected ACUs in the station for system configuration. The system type number is based on DIL-switch settings on the SU. The system type numbers are defined as follows:
6\VWHP 7\SH 1XPEHU 6\VWHP7\SH 6\VWHP 7\SH 1XPEHU 6\VWHP7\SH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1+0 (34) Terminal Not used 1+0 (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 1+0 (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 1+1 (34) Terminal Not used 1+1 (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 1+1 (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 2+0 (34) Terminal Not used 2+0 (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 2+0 (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 1+0 (16x2) Terminal Not usedr 1+0 (16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 1+0 (16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 2+0 (16x2) Terminal Not used 2+0 (16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 2+0 (16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 1+1 (16x2) Terminal Not used 1+1 (16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 1+1 (16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 Hot Standby (34) Terminal Not used
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Hot Standby (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 Hot Standby (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2
Not used Hot Standby (16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 Hot Standby (16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 2+1 (34) Terminal Not used 2+1 (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 2+1 (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 2+1 (16x2) Terminal Not used 2+1 (16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 2+1 (16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 3+0 (34) Terminal Not used 3+0 (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 3+0 (34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 2+1 (34/16x2) Terminal Not used 2+1 (34/16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 2+1 (34/16x2) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2 2+1 (16x2/34) Terminal Not used 2+1 (16x2/34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 2+1 (16x2/34) Add/Drop Repeater Dir2
Table 5-12
System Type Number
5.3.1.6
No of AAUs (SU param 11)

The number of Alarm Adapter Units (AAUs) in the station is set using this parameter. Valid input values range from 0 to 7. The address of each of the AAUs must be set continuously starting at 1 and increasing up to Number of AAUs. For more information on the AAU configuration; see separate AAU description.
B1078
Rev. Q
109
II Operators Guide
Hot Standby (16x2) Terminal
5.3.1.7
SIC1 Type (SU param 15)

The type of electrical interface on the external supervision channel for SIC1 can be defined by changing this parameter. The SU must be reset after changing the parameter. The input parameters are defined in table below. SIC1 Type 0 1 2 3 Table 5-13 Description Transmit RS-422 RS-422 RS-232 RS-232 SIC1 Type Receive RS-422 RS-422 RS-232 RS-232 Data Format 1200 Baud, 8o1 1200 Baud, 8n1, SIC (default) 1200 Baud, 8o1 1200 Baud, 8n1, PC
5.3.1.8
Stationno (SU param 16)

The stations station number is displayed by choosing this parameter. The station number is also displayed in the Sta: parameter in line 2.
5.3.1.9
Sectionno (SU param 17)

The stations section number is displayed and can be entered by choosing this parameter. The section number is also displayed in the Sec: parameter in line 2. After changing the section number, the HHT display will return to the Start-up menu.
5.3.1.10
Space Diversity (SU param 18)

This parameter must be set to 1 if the station has Space Diversity. This will include Space Diversity alarms in the Bit Insert/Extract ACU. In stations without Space Diversity, this parameter should be set to 0.
110
B1078
Rev. Q
5.3.1.11
Network Serial Port (NetA and NetB) Configuration (SU param 20-23)
These parameters set the configuration of the network ports. When a network port, e.g. Net A, is connected to another SU, the address of that SU is entered in parameter NetA_SU and NetA_Sec. These parameters must be entered to get correct operation of Bypass 352 kb/s function and Network Element vieW on PC. Input parameter Value Description 20 (R/W) 0-16 NetA_SU: SU address of connected station on network port A 21 (R/W) 0-128 NetA_SEC: Section address of connected station on network port A 22 (R/W) 0-16 NetB_SU: SU address of connected station on network port B 23 (R/W) 0-128 NetB_SEC: Section address of connected station on network port B Table 5-14 Network Port Configuration Set parameter 20-21 or 22-23 to 0 if specific network port is not connected to other SUs.
5.3.1.12
Bypass_352 (SU param 24)
This parameter enables or disables the Bypass 352 function, and can have the following values: ManHighPri parameter 0 (DISABLED) 1 (ENABLED) Table 5-15 Bypass 352 Description Bypass 352 function is disabled Bypass 352 function is enabled
5.3.1.13
RmtReset (SU param 25)
The station to the left and right of the selected station on the HHT, can be remote reset by inserting a bit in the traffic. This is controlled by the parameter RmtReset, and the different settings are described in table 5-16. The parameter will be reset to 0 after the remote reset command is issued. RmtReset 0 1 2 3 Table 5-16 Description No Remote reset Reset SU on the other side of the hop from terminals. Reset SU downwards from repeaters. Reset SU upwards from repeaters. Reset SU both downwards and upwards from repeaters. RmtReset 111
B1078
Rev. Q
II Operators Guide
Master Terminal
Upwards Up
Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 Dir2
Upwards Up
Slave Terminal
SU
SU
SU
SU
1.1
Down Downwards
1.2
2.1
Down Downwards
2.2
Fig. 5-10
Description of Terms Upwards and Downwards for Remote Reset
5.3.1.14
SetClock (SU param 26)

The real time clock in the network can be updated from the station 1 in section 1 by setting this parameter to 1. The parameter will be reset to 0 after the clock setting has been done.
5.3.1.15
SUs In Sec (SU param 29)

This parameter shows the number of SUs that are present in the section selected.
5.3.1.16
SEC In Net (SU param 30)

This parameter shows the number of sections that are configured in the network configuration on the selected station. The number of sections are based on the network configuration in parameters 32-47 and 100-211.
5.3.1.17
NetToBackp (SU param 31)

This parameter configures which network port, NetA or NetB, that is to be routed to the backplane in an Add/Drop Repeater. To use this feature, the SU must have hardware revision R6A or later and both backplanes must be UWB340. The parameter can have the following values: NetToBackp parameter 0 1 2 Table 5-17 Description No network port routed to backplane Network port NetA routed to backplane Network port NetB routed to backplane
NetToBackp Parameters
112
B1078
Rev. Q
5.3.1.18
Network Configuration (SU param 32-47 and 100-211)

The 34 Mb/s internal supervisory system can handle network configurations of up to 128 switching sections with max. 16 SUs in each section. To be able to route messages between different sections within a network each SU is given an unique routing table. The table contains information on which serial port to select for the different sections, ref. fig. 5-9. The following table gives an overview of the available network connections:
II Operators Guide
Port name Port number (Input value) Description LINK A 0 64 kb/s insert channel A LINK B 1 64 kb/s insert channel B NET A 2 Network Interface A NET B 3 Network Interface B Disable 16 Disable section from network Table 5-18 Network Connections
The configuration of a network address on an SU can be entered via the HHT from any SU within the network. If a complete network is to be configured from one SU, the configuration must be executed in a successive order, starting with present SU. The number of sections within a network is shown by entering input parameter 30 in the configuration menu.
5.3.1.19
Display/Set Real Time Clock (SU param 48-59)

To display and change the SU real time clock the following input parameters are used: 52-53-54-56-57-58-59. The different parameters are used for configuring the clock parameters. Any SU real time clock can be specified within the network. The table below describes the input parameters. Input parameter 48 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Table 5-19 Name Elapsed time since SU reset Second Minutes Hour Day of Week Day Month Year Century Input value 0 - 59 0 - 59 1 - 23 1 - 7 (1 = Sunday) 1 - 31 1 - 12 1 - 99 19-20
Real Time Clock Input Parameters 113
B1078
Rev. Q
5.3.1.20
PC/HHTBaud (SU param 214)

This parameter configures the baud rate on the PC/HHT (front) port of the SU. To use this feature, the SU must have hardware revision R6A or later. The parameter can have the following values: PC/HHTBaud parameter 0 1 Table 5-20 Description 1200 baud on PC/HHT port 9600 baud on PC/HHT port
PC/HHTBaud Parameters
5.3.1.21
PC/SICBaud (SU param 215)

This parameter configures the baud rate on the PC/SIC (top) port of the SU. To use this feature, the SU must have hardware revision R6A or later. The parameter can have the following values: PC/SICBaud parameter 0 1 Table 5-21 Description 1200 baud on PC/SIC port 9600 baud on PC/SIC port
PC/SICBaud Parameters
5.3.1.22 5.3.1.23
Software Release (SU param 237)

This parameter shows the revision of the software on the SU.
NetAConfig (SU param 240)

This parameter configures the NetA network port on the SU. The data format for the asynchronous modes is 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit. The parameter can have the values shown in table 5-22.
5.3.1.24
NetBConfig (SU param 241)

This parameter configures the NetB network port on the SU. The data format for the asynchronous modes is 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit. The parameter can have the values shown in table 5-22. NetAConfig & NetBConfig Description parameters 0 (9600_S) 9600 baud, synchronous (default) 1 (9600_AS) 9600 baud, asynchronous 2 (4800_AS) 4800 baud, asynchronous 3 (2400_AS) 2400 baud, asynchronous 4 (1200_AS) 1200 baud, asynchronous Table 5-22 NetAConfig & NetBConfig Parameters NOTE! When these parameters are changed, the SU must be reset before the changes take place.
114
B1078
Rev. Q
5.3.2
ACU Configuration Parameters

The ACU internal unit number (8-10) is described in table 5-3. The ACU configuration parameters are defined in the table below:
&RQILJXUDWLRQ 6HF 6WD,QWX $&8BVWDWXV[QQ 8VH(6&(17(5
Table 5-23
ACU Configuration Parameters
5.3.2.1
Transmitter Power Control (ACU param 20)

This parameter selects transmitter power control, manual or automatic. To use Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) on a channel, ATPC must be selected on both sides of the hop. The parameter can have the following values: TxPwrCtrl parameter Description 0 (ATPC) Automatic Transmitter Power Control selected 1 (MTPC) Manual Transmitter Power Control selected Table 5-24 Transmitter Power Control Parameter
5.3.2.2
Transmitter Manual Power Attenuation (ACU param 21)

This parameter selects manual transmitter attenuation, if MTPC is selected. The parameter can have the following values: TxManlPwr parameter 0 (0 dBm) 1 (-1 dBm) 2 (-2 dBm) 3 (-3 dBm) 4 (-4 dBm) 5 (-5 dBm) 6 (-6 dBm) 7 (-7 dBm) Table 5-25 Description No attenuation -1 dBm attenuation -2 dBm attenuation -3 dBm attenuation -4 dBm attenuation -5 dBm attenuation -6 dBm attenuation -7 dBm attenuation
Transmitter Manual Power Parameter 115
B1078
Rev. Q
II Operators Guide
Parameter no Display text Description 7 (R) ACU_config: 0xn0 n1 n0 n1 displays the ACU configuration, for Nera internal use only 20 (R/W) TxPwrCtrl: xxxx Transmitter power control 21 (R/W) TxMnlPower: x dBm Manual Tx power attenuation 22 (R/W) TxMnlPower: x dBm Rx reference level for ATPC 237 (R) SW-Release:xxx The software revision on the unit
5.3.2.3
Receiver ATPC Reference Level (ACU param 22)

This parameter selects the ATPC receiver reference level, in the range from -26 dBm to -89 dBm. The reference levels are selected by entering the number value i.e. entering 26 selects -26 dBm as reference level.
5.3.2.4
Software Release (ACU param 237)

This parameter shows the revision of the software on the Bit Insert/Extract unit.
5.3.3
16x2 Mb/s ACU Configuration Parameters

These configuration parameters are only used for 16x2 Mb/s Mux/Demux and Switch Matrix units (Intu: 12-13). The parameters are described in the table below.
Param. No. 11 (R/W) 12 (R/W) 13 (R/W) 33 (R/W) 34 (R/W) 35 (R/W) 36 (R/W) 37 (R/W) 38 (R/W) 39 (R/W) 40 (R/W) 41 (R/W) 42 (R/W) 43 (R/W) 44 (R/W) 45 (R/W) 46 (R/W) 47 (R/W) 48 (R/W) Display Te xt Line Unit_Type: X Bit12_Ins1: X Bit12_Ins2: X Drop1_Dir1: X Drop2_Dir1: X Drop3_Dir1: X Drop4_Dir1: X Ins1_Dir1: X Ins2_Dir1: X Ins3_Dir1: X Ins4_Dir1: X Drop1_Dir2: X Drop2_Dir2: X Drop3_Dir2: X Drop4_Dir2: X Ins1_Dir2: X Ins2_Dir2: X Ins3_Dir2: X Ins4_Dir2: X De scription Indicates type of unit present 2Mb/s Bit12 insertion in Mux/Demux or Switch Matrix dir1 2Mb/s Bit12 insertion in Switch Matrix dir2 Switch Matrix Drop1 Dir1 configuration Switch Matrix Drop2 Dir1 configuration Switch Matrix Drop3 Dir1 configuration Switch Matrix Drop4 Dir1 configuration Switch Matrix Insert1 Dir1 configuration Switch Matrix Insert2 Dir1 configuration Switch Matrix Insert3 Dir1 configuration Switch Matrix Insert4 Dir1 configuration Switch Matrix Drop1 Dir2 configuration Switch Matrix Drop2 Dir2 configuration Switch Matrix Drop3 Dir2 configuration Switch Matrix Drop4 Dir2 configuration Switch Matrix Insert1 Dir2 configuration Switch Matrix Insert2 Dir2 configuration Switch Matrix Insert3 Dir2 configuration Switch Matrix Insert4 Dir2 configuration
Table 5-26
16x2 Mb/s ACU Parameter
116
B1078
Rev. Q
5.3.3.1
Unit Type (16x2 ACU param 11)

The parameter can have the following values:
Unit_Type parameter 0 1 2 Description Ulink unit (UWK7) is present in the selected channel M ux/Demux unit (2NCS521A) is present in the selected channel Sw itch M atrix unit (2NCS522A) is present in the selected channel
Table 5-27
Unit Type Parameter

II Operators Guide
In order to get correct response on TeleScada, this parameter must be set up on Add/Drop repeaters in 16x2 Mb/s systems. On terminals, the parameter is automatically set to 1 (Mux/Demux). The item must be set on both Intu numbers (12 and 13). Intu number 12 represents unit in position 2 in the baseband shelf, and Intu number 13 represents unit in position 4. The following tables show how to set these parameters on a 1+1 16x2 Mb/s Add/ Drop repeater with a) b)
Shelf Dir1 Dir1 Dir2 Dir2
Switch Matrix in Dir1 shelf and Ulink in Dir2 shelf. Mux/Demux in both directions.
Unit Sw itch M atrix in position 2 No unit in position 4 Ulink in position 2 No unit in position 4 SU Dir1 Dir1 Dir2 Dir2 Intu 12 13 12 13 Item 11 11 11 11 Value 2 0 0 0
Table 5-28
1+1 16x2 Mb/s Add/Drop Station with Switch Matrix in Dir1 Shelf and Ulink in Dir2 shelf
Shelf Dir1 Dir1 Dir2 Dir2
Unit M ux/Demux in position 2 No unit in position 4 M ux/Demux in position 2 No unit in position 4
SU Dir1 Dir1 Dir2 Dir2
Intu 12 13 12 13
Item 11 11 11 11
Value 1 0 1 0
Table 5-29
1+1 16x2 Mb/s Add/Drop Station with Mux/Demux in both Directions 117
B1078
Rev. Q
5.3.3.2
Bit 12, National Use (16x2 ACU param 12, 13)

This parameter controls the insertion of Bit 12, the national use bit, in the 34 Mb/s Mux frame. The Bit12_Ins1 parameter is used for Mux/Demux unit and Switch Matrix unit dir 1. The Bit12_Ins2 parameter is used for Switch Matrix unit dir 2. The parameters can have the following values: Bit12_Ins parameter 0 1 Table 5-30 Description Bit 12 is set to 0 in the Mux frame Bit 12 is set to 1 in the Mux frame
Bit12_Ins Parameters
5.3.3.3
Switch Matrix Drop/Insert Configuration (16x2 ACU param 33-48)

These parameters control the Switch Matrix drop/insert configuration and can have the following values: Drop/Insert parameter Description 0 Drop or insert on the selected drop/insert channel is disabled 1-16 Number of the 2Mb/s channel dropped from/inserted into selected drop/insert channel. Table 5-31 Drop/Insert Parameters
'URS0EV ,QVHUW0EV
0EV
'HPX[
[0EV
'LU 6ZLWFK 0DWUL[ 'LU

[0EV
0X[ 'HPX[
[0EV
0EV
0EV
0X[
[0EV
0EV
,QVHUW0EV
'URS0EV
Fig. 5-11 The directions, Dir1 and Dir2, for drop/insert configuration are identical to the terms D1 and D2 described in fig. 5-12. If more than one of the four 2 Mb/s insert inputs are configured to insert on the same 2 Mb/s channel, the signal from the input with the highest number (1-4) will be inserted. 118
B1078 Rev. Q
5.4
Security Menu (F2)
The security menu is selected by pressing the [F2] button.
6HFXULW\ 6HF[6WD[,QWX[ &RQQHFWHG[ 8VH(6&(17(5
5.4.1
SU Security Parameters
The SU Security parameters are defined in table below.
Param. 12 (R) 13 (R) 14 (R) 19 (R/W) 60 (R/W) 61 (R/W) No. Display ControlOut: Alignment1: Alignment2: Text Line D e sc r i p ti on Displays control output of SU Displays status of alignment1 control from SU Displays status of alignment2 control from SU Control of Hot Standby Switch operation Controls use of ChP when it is not used for switching XXX Maximum time (ms) to wait for alignment when aligned switching is de si r e d. Enable/disable Enable/disable Ch1 Ch2 switching switching of of High Low priority priority Priority Priority Manual Manual Switching. Switching. 0xXX X X
Hot Standby: X StandbyCh: AlignmTime: X
62 (R/W) 63 (R/W) 64 (R/W) 65 (R/W) 66 (R/W) 67 (R/W) 68 (R/W) 69 (R/W) 70 (R/W) 71 (R/W) 72 (R/W) 73 (R/W) 74 (R/W) 75 (R) 76 (R)
ManHighPri: ManLowPri: Ch1_Pri: Ch2_Pri: Switch: Reswitch: X X LBER
ENABLED ENABLED
Switch limit Reswitch limit
LBER 0xXX 0xXX 0xXX X
AlmMaskChP: AlmMaskCh1: AlmMaskCh2: ManChannel: ManPri: ManMode: ManAction: ManError: ProtRxManl: LOW
ChP switch criteria alarm mask Ch1 switch criteria alarm mask Ch2 switch criteria alarm mask Channel to be manually switched Priority of manual switching to be performed Type of manual switching to be performed Manual switching action to be performed Error code from last performed manual switching Displays whether ChP is currently manually switched in receiver di r ec ti on Displays use of ChP in receiver direction Displays use of ChP in transmitter direction Displays ChP switch criteria status Displays Ch1 switch criteria status Displays Ch2 switch criteria status Displays whether AIS has been inserted on occasional traffic output
HITLESS SWITCH XX YES
77 (R) 78 (R) 79 (R) 80 (R) 81 (R) 82 (R)
ProtRxTraf: ProtTxTraf: Crit_ChP: Crit_Ch1: Crit_Ch2:
XXX X 0x0X 0xXX 0xXX YES
AIS_OccOut:
83 (R)
AIS_Ch1:
YES
Display whether AIS has been inserted in Ch1 alignment unit (not valid if Switch Matrix in Ch1) Display whether AIS has been inserted in Ch2 alignment unit (not valid if Switch Matrix in Ch2) RUNNING Displays the state of the switching order communication Displays status for manual switching
84 (R)
AIS_Ch2:
YES
85 (R) 86 (R)
OrderComRx: ManlStatus:
0xXX
Table 5-32
B1078 Rev. Q
SU Parameters 119
II Operators Guide
5.4.1.1
ControlOut (SU param 12)

The status of the control output latch on the SU can be shown by choosing this parameter. The bits in the hexadecimal byte are coded as follows:
ControlOut Parameter Bit0: XM TR_SW_0 Bit1: XM TR_SW_1 Bit2: CH_SEL Ch1 Bit3: CH_SEL Ch2 Bit4: AIS_INS Occasional Bit5: AIS_INS Alignment1 Bit6: AIS_INS Alignment2 Bit7: SW_EN Description Control of ChP Xmtr Sw itch, LSB Control of ChP Xmtr Sw itch, M SB Control of alignment sw itch for Channel 1 Control of alignment sw itch for Channel 2 Control of AIS insertion on Occasional Traffic output Control of AIS insertion in alignment unit for Channel 1 Control of AIS insertion in alignment unit for Channel 2 Sw itch Enable
Table 5-33
ControlOut Parameters
5.4.1.2
Alignment1 (SU param 13)

The status of the control output to Alignment1 from the SU can be shown by choosing this parameter. The control output also goes to the PAL for generation of urgent alarm in the station. The parameter can have the following values:
Alignment1 parameter PROT REGL Description Protection channel is selected in Alignment1 Regular channel is selected in Alignment1
Table 5-34
Alignment1 Parameters
5.4.1.3
Alignment2 (SU param 14)

The status of the control output to Alignment2 from the SU can be shown by choosing this parameter. The control output also goes to the PAL for generation of urgent alarm in the station. The parameter can have the following values:
$OLJQPHQW SDUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
PROT REGL
Protection channel is selected in Alignment2 Regular channel is selected in Alignment2
Table 5-35
Alignment2 Parameters
120
B1078
Rev. Q
5.4.1.4
Hot Standby Switch Control (SU param 19)

This parameter controls the operation of the Hot Standby Switch. The parameter is decoded as follows:
Hot Standby parameter Description 0 Automatic Hot Standby switch control by BIT ACUs 1 Set Hot Standby Switch to Channel 1 (Manually) 2 Set Hot Standby Switch to Channel P (Manually)
Table 5-36
Hot Standby Parameters

II Operators Guide
5.4.1.5
Standby Channel (SU param 60)

This parameter controls the use of Channel P when no regular channel is switched, and can have the following values:
6WDQGE\&KSDUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 1 2 3
Channel P is used for occasional traffic Channel P is standby channel for Channel 1 Channel P is standby channel for Channel 2 Channel P is standby channel for last channel switched (dynamic)
Table 5-37
Standby Ch. Parameters
5.4.1.6
Alignment Timeout (SU param 61)

This parameter controls the maximum time (in ms) to wait for alignment when aligned protection switching is desired. If alignment is not achieved within the selected timeout period, a forced automatic switching will be carried out. A manual switching with alignment will be denied, returning error code 5. If invalid values are entered, they will be rounded up to the closest valid value. The parameter can have the following values:
$OLJQP7LPH SDUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 8, 12, 16, ..., 92, 96, 100
No waiting for alignment Wait maximum 8,12, 16, ..., 92, 96, 100 ms for alignment
Table 5-38
Alignment Timeout Parameters
5.4.1.7
High Priority Manual Switching (SU param 62)

This parameter enables or disables High Priority Manual Switching, and can have the following values:
M anHighPri parameter 0 (DISABLED) 1 (ENABLED) Description High Priority M anual Sw itching is disabled High Priority M anual Sw itching is enabled
Table 5-39
B1078 Rev. Q
High Priority Manual Switching Parameters 121
5.4.1.8
Low Priority Manual Switching (SU param 63)

This parameter enables or disables Low Priority Manual Switching, and can have the following values:
0DQ/RZ3UL SDUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 (DISABLED) 1 (ENABLED)
Low Priority Manual Switching is disabled Low Priority Manual Switching is enabled
Table 5-40
Low Priority Manual Switching Parameters
5.4.1.9
Channel 1 Switching Priority (SU param 64)

This parameter controls the switching priority for Channel 1, and can have the following values:
&KB3UL SDUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 1 2
Channel 1 is excluded from switching Channel 1 has low switching priority Channel 1 has high switching priority
Table 5-41
Channel 1 Switching Priority Parameters
5.4.1.10
Channel 2 Switching Priority (SU param 65)

This parameter controls the switching priority for Channel 2, and can have the following values:
Ch2_Pri parameter 0 1 2 Description Channel 2 is excluded from sw itching Channel 2 has low sw itching priority Channel 2 has high sw itching priority
Table 5-42
Channel 2 Switching Priority Parameters
5.4.1.11
Switch Limit (SU param 66)

This parameter controls the Switch Limit, which is the minimum switching criteria to occur before an automatic switching takes place. The parameter can have the following values:
6ZLWFK SDUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 (LBER) 1 (HBER/SL)
Low BER is the Switch Limit High BER/Sync. loss is the Switch Limit
Table 5-43 122
Switch Limit Parameters

B1078 Rev. Q
5.4.1.12
Reswitch Limit (SU param 67)

This parameter controls the Reswitch Limit, which is the switching criteria to go off before an automatic reswitching takes place. The parameter can have the following values:
5HVZLWFK SDUDPHWHU 'HVFUL SWL RQ
0 1
(LBER) (HBER/SL)
Low High
BER
is
the
Reswitch is the
Limit Reswitch Limit
BER/Sync.
loss
Table 5-44
Reswitch Limit Parameters

II Operators Guide
5.4.1.13
Alarm Mask Channel P (SU param 68)

This parameter controls the switch criteria alarm mask for Channel P. The bits in the hexadecimal byte are coded as follows; Bit0: Low BER, Bit1: High BER, Bit2: Sync. loss, which gives the following:
A lmMaskChP/1/2 parameter Description
0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 No alarms enabled Low BER enabled, High BER and Sync. loss disabled High BER enabled, Low BER and Sync. loss disabled Low BER and High BER enabled, Sync. loss disabled Sync. loss enabled, Low BER and High BER disabled Low BER and Sync. loss enabled, High BER disabled High BER and Sync. loss enabled, Low BER disabled All alarms enabled
Table 5-45
Alarm Mask Parameters
5.4.1.14
Alarm Mask Channel 1 (SU param 69)

This parameter controls the switch criteria alarm mask for Channel 1. The bits in the hexadecimal byte are coded as in table 5-45.
5.4.1.15
Alarm Mask Channel 2 (SU param 70)

This parameter controls the switch criteria alarm mask for Channel 2. The bits in the hexadecimal byte are coded as in table 5-45.
5.4.1.16
Manual Channel (SU param 71)

This parameter controls which channel shall be manually switched. The parameter can have the following values:
M anChannel parameter 0 1 2 Description Select occasional traffic for manual sw itching Select Channel 1 for manual sw itching Select Channel 2 for manual sw itching
Table 5-46
B1078 Rev. Q
Manual Channel Parameters 123
5.4.1.17
Manual Priority (SU param 72)

This parameter controls the priority of the manual switching to be performed. A manual switching can have high or low priority. A low priority manual switching will be cancelled by a automatic switching if necessary. A high priority manual switching can not be cancelled by automatic switching. The parameter can have the following values:
M anPri parameter 0 (LOW) 1 (HIGH) Description M anual sw itching to be performed w ill have low priority M anual sw itching to be performed w ill have high priority
Table 5-47
Manual Priority Parameters
5.4.1.18
Manual Mode (SU param 73)

This parameter controls the mode of the manual switching to be performed. A manual switching can be either hitless or forced. If hitless is selected, the selected channel will not be switched if the regular and protection channels are not aligned within the time specified by the AlignmTime parameter (item 61). If forced is selected, the selected channel will be switched independently of the state of the channels alignment indicator. The parameter can have the following parameters:
M anM ode parameter 0 (HITLESS) 1 (FORCED) Description M anual sw itching to be performed w ill be hitless M anual sw itching to be performed w ill be forced
Table 5-48
Manual Mode Parameters
5.4.1.19
Manual Action (SU param 74)

This parameter controls the action of the manual switching to be performed. Entering a value and then pressing [ENTER] will execute a manual switching order. If the manual switching order fails, see 5.4.1.20, the parameter must be reentered and executed again for a new manual switching order. When read the parameter displays the manual switching that was last carried out. The parameter can have the following values:
M anAction parameter Description 0 (RESTORE) 1 (SWITCH) M anual sw itching action to be performed w ill be a restore M anual sw itching action to be performed w ill be a sw itch
Table 5-49
Manual Action Parameters
124
B1078
Rev. Q
5.4.1.20
Manual Error Code (SU param 75)

This parameter displays the error code from the last performed manual switching. The parameter can have the following values:
ManError parameter 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description Completed OK Protection occupied Protection alarms NACK from remote SU Alignment timeout Remote input alarm Timeout No channel to restore Channel already manually sw itched Low priority manual sw itching disabled High priority manual sw itching disabled Channel priority is 0 Illegal channel Occasional traffic not selected Sw itching not available
Table 5-50
Manual Error Code Parameters
5.4.1.21
ChP Manually switched in Rx Direction (SU param 76)

This parameter displays whether Channel P has been manually switched in receiver direction. The parameter can have the following values:
ProtRxM anl parameter NO Y ES Description Channel P not manually sw itched in receiver direction Channel P manually sw itched in receiver direction
Table 5-51
Prot Rx Man Parameters
B1078
Rev. Q
125
II Operators Guide
Remote SU not responding
5.4.1.22
Use of Channel P in Rx Direction (SU param 77)

This parameter displays the use of Channel P in receiver direction. The parameter can have the following values:
ProtRxTraf 0 1 2 255 parameter De s cr iptio n Channel P is used for occasional traffic in receiver direction Channel P is used for Channel 1 in receiver direction Channel P is used for Channel 2 in receiver direction Channel P is available in receiver direction
Table 5-52
Prot Rx Traf Parameters
5.4.1.23
Use of Channel P in Tx Direction (SU param 78)

This parameter displays the use of Channel P in transmitter direction (Channel P Xmtr Switch). The parameter can have the following values:
ProtTxTraf 0 1 2 parameter De s cr iptio n Channel P is used for occasional traffic in transmitter direction Channel P is used for Channel 1 in transmitter direction Channel P is used for Channel 2 in transmitter direction
Table 5-53
Prot Tx Traf Parameters
5.4.1.24
Channel P Switch Criteria Status (SU param 79)

This parameter displays the Channel P Switch Criteria Status. The bits in the hexadecimal byte are coded as follows; Bit0: Low BER, Bit1: High BER, Bit2: Sync. loss, which gives the following:
Crit_ChP parameter Des c rip tio n No alarms on Low BER on, High BER and Sync. loss off High BER on, Low BER and Sync. loss off Low BER and High BER on, Sync. loss off Sync. loss on, Low BER and High BER off Low BER and Sync. loss on, High BER off High BER and Sync. loss on, Low BER off All alarms on
0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07
Table 5-54 126
Crit_ChP Parameters
B1078 Rev. Q
5.4.1.25
Channel 1 Switch Criteria Status (SU param 80)

This parameter displays the Channel 1 Switch Criteria Status. The bits in the hexadecimal byte are coded as follows; Bit0: Low BER, Bit1: High BER, Bit2: Sync. loss, Bit4: Alignment indicator, which gives the following:
Crit_Ch1/2 parame te r De scription 0xX0 0xX1 0xX2 0xX3 0xX4 0xX5 0xX6 0xX7 0x0X 0x1X No alarms on Low BER on, High BER and Sync. loss off High BER on, Low BER and Sync. loss off Low BER and High BER on, Sync. loss off Sync. loss on, Low BER and High BER off Low BER and Sync. loss on, High BER off High BER and Sync. loss on, Low BER off All alarms on Channel 1 aligned Channel 1 not aligned
X means no significance Table 5-55 Crit_Ch1/2 Parameters
5.4.1.26
Channel 2 Switch Criteria Status (SU param 81)

This parameter displays the Channel 2 Switch Criteria Status. The bits in the hexadecimal byte are coded as in table 5-55.
5.4.1.27
AIS Occasional Traffic Output (SU param 82)

This parameter displays whether AIS has been inserted on occasional traffic output. The parameter can have the following values:
AIS_Occ parameter NO YES D es cr ip tion AIS has not been inserted on occasional traffic output AIS has been inserted on occasional traffic output
Table 5-56
AIS Occasional Traffic Output Parameters
5.4.1.28
AIS Alignment Channel 1 (SU param 83)

This parameter displays whether AIS has been inserted in Channel 1 alignment unit (not valid if a Switch Matrix unit is present in Channel 1). The parameter can have the following values:
AIS_Ch1 parameter NO YES D es cr ip tion AIS has not been inserted in Channel 1 alignment unit AIS has been inserted in Channel 1 alignment unit
Table 5-57
B1078 Rev. Q
AIS Alignment Channel 1 Parameters 127
II Operators Guide
5.4.1.29
AIS Alignment Channel 2 (SU param 84)

This parameter displays whether AIS has been inserted in Channel 2 alignment unit (not valid if a Switch Matrix unit is present in Channel 2). The parameter can have the following values:
AIS_Ch2 parameter NO YES De sc ript io n AIS has not been inserted in Channel 2 alignment unit AIS has been inserted in Channel 2 alignment unit
Table 5-58
AIS Alignment Channel 2 Parameters
5.4.1.30
Switching Order Communication (SU param 85)

This parameter displays status for the switching order communication. The parameter can have the following values:
OrderComRx parameter D es cr ip tion Switching order communication is running Switching order communication has stopped (also in N+0 systems)
RUNNING STOPPED
Table 5-59
Switching Order Communication Parameters
5.4.1.31
Manual Switching Status (SU param 86)

This parameter displays the status of the manual switching. The bits in the hexadecimal byte are coded as follows; Bit0-1: Type of manual switching performed, Bit4-5: Channel manually switched. This gives the following:
M an lS ta tu s parameter 0x00 0x01 0x11 0x21 0x02 0x12 0x22 D es cr ip tion No manual switching currently performed Occasional traffic low priority manual switching currently performed Channel 1 low priority manual switching currently performed Channel 2 low priority manual switching currently performed Occasional traffic high priority manual switching currently performed Channel 1 high priority manual switching currently performed Channel 2 high priority manual switching currently performed
Table 5-60
Manual Switching Status Parameters
128
B1078
Rev. Q
5.4.2
ACU Security Parameters

The ACU internal unit number is described in table 5-3.
Security Sec:1 Sta: 1 Intu: 9 ACU_swit1: 0x00 Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
The ACU security parameters are defined in the table below. Param. No. Display Text Line Description 8 (R) ACU swit1: 0xxx Displays switching byte 1 sent to BIT ACU (internal use only) 9 (R) ACU swit2: 0xxx Displays switching byte 2 sent to BIT ACU (internal use only) 10 (R) ACU swit3: 0xxx Displays switching byte 3 sent to BIT ACU (internal use only) 12 (R) XMTR SW: x Displays status of XMTR switch for Channel 15 (R/W) HBER Sel: x Selects Bit Error Ratio for generation of HBER 16 (R/W) 34 AIS En: x Selects AIS mode 34 Mb/s for Channel 17 (R/W) 34 AIS Set: x Selects AIS mode 34 Mb/s for Channel 18 (R/W) 2 AIS En: x Selects AIS mode 2 Mb/s for Channel 19 (R/W) 2 AIS Set: x Selects AIS mode 2 Mb/s for Channel Table 5-61 ACU Parameters
II Operators Guide
5.4.2.1
Display XMTR Switch Setting (ACU param 12)

The parameter displays the software setting of the XMTR switch on the channel. The XMTR setting is set based on system configuration set on the SU. The XMTR switch can be manually controlled on the Bit Insert/Extract unit, and this parameter will not read this setting.
5.4.2.2
HBER Selection (ACU param 15)

The parameter sets the error ratio that generates HBER alarm. The parameter is set as follows: Parameter HBER = 0 HBER = 1 Table 5-62 Description 10-3 (Default) 10-4
HBER Selection Parameters 129
B1078
Rev. Q
5.4.2.3
34 Mb/s AIS Configuration (ACU param 16-17)

The AIS insertion in the 34 Mb/s data from the Bit Extractor is controlled by the ACU on each channels Bit Insert/Extract unit. The AIS control signal is set if any of the following alarms are detected on the channel, and is set out automatically by the BIT-ACU. The control signal is routed to the Bit Extract unit, and inserts AIS on all 3 outputs from the Bit Extract unit. A setup command from the SU to the BIT-ACU will choose between 2 set-ups for which alarms to include in generating the AIS control signal. Set-up 1 (Default): AIS_INS_1: If any of the following alarms are set, AIS will be inserted on the channel RF_SL_HOP_O HBER_HOP_O IF_INPUT_ALARM DEMODULATOR Set-up 2: AIS_INS_2: If any of the following alarms are set, AIS will be inserted on the channel RF_SL_HOP_O DEMODULATOR The setting of the AIS control signal will be evaluated when alarms are read by the ACU, i.e. every 10th. ms. The setting of 34 Mb/s AIS is done with parameters 16 and 17 for each ACU Decoding of the AIS insert 34 Mb/s bytes is done as follows: 34 AIS En (Parameter 16) 0 0 1 1 Table 5-63 34 AIS Set (Parameter 17) 0 1 0 1 Description Auto, Alarm Set 1 (Default) Auto, Alarm Set 2 Manual, AIS OFF Manual, AIS ON
34 Mb/s AIS Configuration Parameters
130
B1078
Rev. Q
5.4.2.4
2 Mb/s AIS Configuration (ACU param 18-19)

The AIS insertion in the 2 Mb/s data from the Bit Extractor is controlled by the ACU on each channels Bit Insert/Extract unit. This AIS control signal is set if any of the following alarms are detected on the channel, and is set out automatically by the BIT-ACU. The control signal is routed to the Bit Extract unit, and inserts AIS on the 2 Mb/s output from the Bit Extract unit. A set-up command from the SU to the BIT-ACU will be used to choose which alarms to include in generating the AIS control signal for the 2 Mb/s. The 2 Mb/s AIS insertion will follow the AIS insertion in the 34 Mb/s data. Set-up 1 (Default): AIS_INS_1: If any of the following alarms are set, AIS 2 Mb/s will be inserted on the channel RF_SL_HOP_O HBER_HOP_O IF_INPUT_ALARM DEMODULATOR Set-up 2: AIS_INS_2: If any of the following alarms are set, AIS 2 Mb/s will be inserted on the channel RF_SL_HOP_O DEMODULATOR The setting of the AIS control signal will be evaluated when alarms are read by the ACU, i.e. every 10th. ms. The setting of 2 Mb/s AIS is done with parameters 18 and 19 for each ACU. Decoding of the AIS insert 2 Mb/s bytes is done as follows: 2 AIS En (Parameter 18) 0 0 1 1 Table 5-64 2 AIS Set (Parameter 19) 0 1 0 1 Description Auto, Alarm Set 1 (Default) Auto, Alarm Set 2 Manual, AIS OFF Manual, AIS ON
II Operators Guide
2 Mb/s AIS Configuration Parameters 131
B1078
Rev. Q
5.5
Fault Menu (F3)

The Fault Menu is selected by pressing the [F3] button
The ALM! indicates that at least one alarm is ON.
Fault Sec: 1 Sta: 1 Intu: x ACU_status: 0xn1n0 ACU(99-):ALM!
5.5.1
SU Fault Parameters
)DXOW 6HF 6WD ,QWX $' 'LVS

8VH(6&(17(5
The SU Fault Parameters are defined in the table below: Param. No. 27 (R) 212 (R/W) 213 (R/W) Display Text Line Main AlmSec: x A/D Disp A/D Mode Description Shows if there are any main alarms in the section. The display modus of the analogue inputs is selected. The type of analogue inputs from the radio is selected, RF-input and AGC measurement
Table 5-65
SU Fault Parameters
5.5.1.1
A/D Display Mode (SU param 212)

This parameter sets the Display Mode for the analogue values on the HHT. The parameter is decoded as follows: 0 - Voltage for PWR measurements and dBm for RF Input Levels 1 - Voltage for both PWR and RF Input Levels 2 - Raw value before conversion to dBm or voltage
5.5.1.2
A/D Mode (SU param 213)

This parameter sets the type of input measurements in the Transceiver; RF Input Level or AGC voltage. This is dependent of transceiver type, and should be set to "0" for RF Input Level and "1" for AGC voltage.
132
B1078
Rev. Q
5.5.2
ACU Fault Parameters

The ACU internal unit number is described in table 5-3.
Fault Sec: 1 Sta: 1 Intu: x ACU_status: 0xn1n0 ACU(99-):ALM!
Parameter Display text no 6 (R) ACU_status: 0xn0 n1 81 (R) 82 (R) 83 (R) 84 (R) 85 (R) 86 (R) 89 (R) 91 (R) 93 (R) 95 (R) 97 (R/W) 99 (R) 100 (R) +11 V +5 V -11 V -5 V Fiber Input Fiber Input Space Main Fiber_Ref. RF_Inp_Ref AD_Offset 1 MainCh UrgentCh
Description n0 n1 displays the ACU status (internal use only) Power supply +11 V on Bit Insert/Extract unit Power supply +5 V on Bit Insert/ Extract unit Power supply -11 V on Bit Insert/ Extract unit Power supply -5 V on Bit Insert/ Extract unit Not used Not used RF-inp. level for Space Diversity RF-inp. level for Main Diversity Reference counter for fiber Reference counter for RF input Offset value for AGC Main HIGH = Main Alarm on unit LOW = Not Main alarm on unit HIGH = Urgent Alarm on unit LOW = Not Urgent alarm on unit HIGH = Alarm LOW = No alarm
101-220 (R) Alarm(x): HIGH Table 5-66 ACU input parameters
B1078
Rev. Q
133
II Operators Guide
The ACU fault parameters are defined in the table below.
5.5.2.1
Analogue Values (ACU param 81-91)

Each channels Bit Insert/Extract ACU measures power supply voltage, laser currents and input and output power. The Analogue/Digital converter has 4 analogue inputs and the resolution is 8 bits (256 levels). The value from the converter is converted to a voltage reading before it is displayed on the HHT. The reading of the input and output levels is done by using counters, and the value is converted to dBm or voltage before it is displayed on the HHT. The analogue values with its parameter numbers are as shown in table 5-66. The display mode is selected with the A/D Disp parameter, ref. 5.5.1.1.
5.5.2.2
Configuration of AGC Main Measurement (ACU param 97)

The AGC Main A/D raw value is corrected with offset value given in this parameter before it is displayed on the HHT, and sent to SIC/PC supervisory systems. The value is decoded as follows: AD Offset Value 0 1, 2, 3 ... Description No offset added or subtracted Add 1, 2, 3 ... of the A/D raw value before converting to voltage for HHT display and SIC/PC 10001, 10002, 10003 ... Subtract 1, 2, 3 ... of the A/D raw value before converting to voltage for HHT display and SIC/PC Table 5-67 AD Offset values
134
B1078
Rev. Q
5.5.2.3
Alarm List for Bit Insert/Extract ACU (ACU param 99-172)

The SU collects 72 alarms from each Bit Insert/Extract ACU. The alarm set collected are as follows:
List of alarms
Param No 99 100 101
Al No Signal Name Main Main Ch Urgent Urgent Ch AL1 INP_HDB3_ALM (I)
Description
105 106 107 108
109 110 111 112
113 114 115 116 117* 118 119* 120* 121* 122* 123* 124 125* 126* 127* 128* 129*
B1078 Rev. Q
135
II Operators Guide
102 103 104
Main Alarm generated from ACU Urgent Alarm generated from ACU INP_HDB3_ALM from Alignment I in 34 Mb/s Systems MAIN_MUX/SWM_1 Main Alarm from MUX or SWM pos no. 2 in 16x2 Mb/s Systems AL2 INP_REG_ALM (I) INP_REG_ALM from Alignment I AL3 INP_PROT_ALM (I) INP_PROT_ALM from Alignment I AL4 OUTPUT_ALM (I) OUTPUT_ALM from Alignment I in 34 Mb/s Systems URGENT_MUX/SWM_1 Urgent Alm from MUX or SWM pos no. 2 in 16x2 Mb/s Systems AL5 ALIGN_PLL_ALM (I) ALIGN_PLL_ALM from Alignment I IN6 ACTIVE_CH (I) ACTIVE_CH from Alignment I (H = Ch1, L = ChP) AL7 MAN_SW_EN (I) MAN_SW_EN from Alignment I AL8 INP_HDB3_ALM (II) INP_HDB3_ALM from Alignment II in 34 Mb/s Systems MAIN_MUX/SWM_2 Main Alarm from MUX or SWM pos no. 4 in 16x2 Mb/s Systems IN9 AIS_ALIGN (I) AIS_ALIGN out from Alignment I AL10 INP_PROT_ALM (II) INP_PROT_ALM from Alignment II AL11 INP_REG_ALM (II) INP_REG_ALM from Alignment II AL12 OUTPUT_ALM (II) OUTPUT_ALM from Alignment II in 34 Mb/s Systems URGENT_MUX/SWM_2 Urgent Alm from MUX or SWM pos no. 4 in 16x2 Mb/s Systems AL13 ALIGN_PLL_ALM (II) ALIGN_PLL_ALM from Alignment II IN14 ACTIVE_CH (II) ACTIVE_CH from Alignment II (H = Ch1, L = ChP) AL15 MAN_SW_EN (II) MAN_SW_EN from Alignment II IN16 AIS_ALIGN (II) AIS_ALIGN out from Alignment II AL17 EXPRESS_ALM Unit alarm own board position no. 4 AL18 BYPASS_352_ALM Bypass signal from own SU/Subinsert, board position no. 6 AL19 OMNIBUS_ALM Unit alarm own board position no. 5 AL20 BYPASS_352_SHELF2_ALM Bypass signal from other SU/ Subinsert, board position no. 6 AL21 ADAPT2_ALM Unit alarm own adapter position no. 2 AL22 ADAPT1_ALM Unit alarm own adapter position no. 1 AL23 ADAPT3_ALM Unit alarm own adapter position no. 3 AL24 PWR3_ALM Unit alarm power supply own adapter position no. 6 AL25 PWR5_ALM Unit alarm power supply other adapter position no. 6 AL26 PWR4_ALM Unit alarm power supply own adapter position no. 5 AL27 ADAPT4_ALM Unit alarm own adapter position no. 4 AL28 ADAPT5_ALM Unit alarm other adapter position no. 1 AL29 ADAPT6_ALM Unit alarm other adapter position no. 2
Param Al No No 130* AL30 131* AL31 132* AL32 133 AL33 134 AL34 135 AL35 136 AL36 137 AL37 138 AL38 139 AL39 140 AL40 141 AL41 142 AL42 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154* 155* 156* 157 158 159** 160* 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 AL43 AL44 AL45 AL46 AL47 AL48 IN49 AL50 IN51 IN52 IN53 AL54 AL55 AL56 AL57 AL58 AL59 AL60 AL61 AL62 AL63 AL64 AL65 AL66 AL67 AL68 AL69 AL70 IN71 IN72
Signal Name ADAPT7_ALM ADAPT8_ALM ADAPT9_ALM PWR_OUT_ALM RF_INPUT_ALM LO_ALM IF_INPUT_ALM PWR1_ALM PWR2_ALM HOT_STBY_ALM IF_INPUT_ALM INP_MOD_ALM DEMOD_ALM
Description
Unit alarm other adapter position no. 3 Unit alarm other adapter position no. 4 Unit alarm other adapter position no. 5 Int alm, RF-power out from transmitter (main) -R1 Int alm, RF-input level to receiver (main) - R2 Int alm, Sync Loss synthesizer (main) - R3 Int alm, IF-input level to transmitter (main) - R4 Int alm, Power supply 1 - pos. no. 6 (main) - R6 Int alm, Power supply 2 - pos. no. 5 (space) - R7 Int alm, Hot stand-by switch control alarm - R8 Int alm, IF-input level to modem (modem) - R9 Int alm, Input alarm to modem. (modem) - R10 Int alm, Demodulator. (collective-)alarm (modem) - R11 SPARE Int alm, spare alarm from modem - R12 RF_INPUT_ALM Int alm, RF-input level to receiver (space) - R13 LO_ALM Int alm, Sync Loss synthesizer (space) - R14 SD_MNL_LOCK_ALM Int alm, alarm from Controller Bd. (space) - R16 SD_CONT_ALM Int alm, alarm from Controller Bd. (space) - R17 ALM_LINE_INTFC_CH1Int alm, alarm from outdoor line interface bd. Ch1 in Split Mount systems - R17 SD_COMB_ALM Int alm, alarm from Combiner (space) - R18 ALM_LINE_INTFC_CH2Int alm, alarm from outdoor line interface bd. Ch2/P in Split Mount systems - R17 8 HOT_STBY_IND Int ind, position indicator from Hot stand-by switch - R19 Low = Ch1, High = ChP IF_INP_EQL_ALM Int alm, alm from equalizer line Bd (space) - R20 2MB_ADAP_CONF Ext ind, 2 Mb/s Adapter configuration status AIS_2MB_ADAPT_IND Ext ind, AIS transmitted from 2 Mb/s Adapter SPARE_EW Int ind, Early Warning (Spare) - R23 EXPRESS2_ALM Unit alarm from other board position no. 4 OMNIBUS2_ALM Unit alarm from other board position no. 5 ADAPT_ALM Int alm, Comb. alm. from all adapters in extra shelf INP1_34MB_ALM Int alm, Input alarm in XMTR_SW input no. 1 (bb) INP2_34MB_ALM Int alm, Input alarm in XMTR_SW input no. 2 (bb) INP3_34MB_ALM Int alm, Input alarm in XMTR_SW input no. 3 (bb) INP_2MB_ALM Int alm, Input alarm on 2 Mb/s wayside-input (bb) INS_PLL_ALM Int alm, PLL alarm in 37.356 MHz insert-PLL (bb) Int alm, PLL alarm in 34.368 MHz extract-PLL (bb) EXT_PLL_ALM SUB_ALM Subinsert alarm from own SU/Subins bd position no. 6 MAN_SW_ALM Int alm, alarm when manual XMTR_SW activated (bb) AIS_34MB_EXT_IND Int ind, AIS detected from RCVR DISTR (bb) AIS_2MB_EXT_IND Int ind, AIS detected on 2 Mb/s wayside output (bb) RF_SL_SEC_O Int alm, RF-Sync Loss, section (bb) RF_SL_HOP_O Int alm, RF-Sync Loss last hop (bb) HBER_HOP_O Int alm, High BER last hop (bb) LBER_HOP_O Int ind, Low BER last hop (bb) XS_STAT_0 Int ind, status on lsb, XMTR_SW (bb) XS_STAT_1 Int ind, status on msb, XMTR_SW (bb)
* Marked alarms are adaptive, see Chapter 5.5.2.6 for description. ** Adaptive in N+1 systems
Table 5-68 136
Alarm signals, Bit Insert/Extract ACU

B1078 Rev. Q
5.5.2.4
Alarm list for Mux/Demux ACU (16x2 ACU param 101-180)

The SU collects 80 alarms from the Mux/Demux ACU. The alarm set collected are as follows:
Param No 101* 102* 103* 104* 105* 106* 107* 108* 109* 110* 111* 112* 113* 114* 115* 116* 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 Al No AL1 AL2 AL3 AL4 AL5 AL6 AL7 AL8 AL9 AL10 AL11 AL12 AL13 AL14 AL15 AL16 AL17 AL18 AL19 AL20 AL21 AL22 AL23 AL24 AL25 AL26 AL27 AL28 AL29 AL30 AL31 AL32 IN33 IN34 IN35 IN36 IN37 IN38 IN39 IN40 IN41 Signal Name INP_ALM_1 INP_ALM_2 INP_ALM_3 INP_ALM_4 INP_ALM_5 INP_ALM_6 INP_ALM_7 INP_ALM_8 INP_ALM_9 INP_ALM_10 INP_ALM_11 INP_ALM_12 INP_ALM_13 INP_ALM_14 INP_ALM_15 INP_ALM_16 OUT_ALM_1 OUT_ALM_2 OUT_ALM_3 OUT_ALM_4 OUT_ALM_5 OUT_ALM_6 OUT_ALM_7 OUT_ALM_8 OUT_ALM_9 OUT_ALM_10 OUT_ALM_11 OUT_ALM_12 OUT_ALM_13 OUT_ALM_14 OUT_ALM_15 OUT_ALM_16 AIS_2M_1 AIS_2M_2 AIS_2M_3 AIS_2M_4 AIS_2M_5 AIS_2M_6 AIS_2M_7 AIS_2M_8 AIS_2M_9 Description Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 1 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 2 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 3 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 4 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 5 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 6 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 7 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 8 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 9 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 10 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 11 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 12 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 13 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 14 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 15 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s input, channel 16 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 1 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 2 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 3 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 4 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 5 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 6 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 7 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 8 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 9 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 10 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 11 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 12 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 13 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 14 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 15 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, channel 16 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 1 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 2 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 3 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 4 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 5 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 6 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 7 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 8 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 9
B1078
Rev. Q
137
II Operators Guide
Param No 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173
Al No IN42 IN43 IN44 IN45 IN46 IN47 IN48 AL49 IN50 IN51 IN52 AL53 IN54 IN55 IN56 AL57 IN58 IN59 IN60 AL61 IN62 IN63 IN64 AL65 IN66 IN67 IN68 IN69 IN70 AL71 AL72 AL73
Signal Name AIS_2M_10 AIS_2M_11 AIS_2M_12 AIS_2M_13 AIS_2M_14 AIS_2M_15 AIS_2M_16 SYNCL_8M_0 AIS_8M_0 BIT11_8M_0
Description
AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 10 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 11 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 12 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 13 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 14 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 15 AIS on 2Mb/s output, channel 16 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 0 AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 0 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 0 BIT12_8M_0 NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 0 SYNCL_8M_1 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 1 AIS_8M_1 AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 1 BIT11_8M_1 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 1 BIT12_8M_1 NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 1 SYNCL_8M_2 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 2 AIS_8M_2 AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 2 BIT11_8M_2 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 2 BIT12_8M_2 NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 2 SYNCL_8M_3 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 3 AIS_8M_3 AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 3 BIT11_8M_3 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 3 BIT12_8M_3 NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 3 SYNCL_34M Sync loss on 34Mb/s signal to demux AIS_34M AIS detected on 34 Mb/s signal to demux BIT11_34M RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 34Mb/s BIT12_34M NU (National Use) bit detected on 34Mb/s PRBS_SYLOSS Indicates no PRBS data received on the selected 2Mb/s. VALID_CRC CRC synchronization on the selected 2Mb/s Spare Spare INP_ALM_REG Loss of signal at 34Mb/s regular input channel
138
B1078
Rev. Q
Param Al No Signal Name No 174 AL74 INP_ALM_PROT 175 176 177 178 179 180 AL75 AL76 IN77 IN78 AL79 AL80
Description
* Marked alarms are adaptive, see para 5.5.2.6 for description.
Table 5-69
Alarm signals, MUX/DEMUX ACU
5.5.2.5
Alarm List for Switch Matrix ACU (16x2 ACU param 101-220)
The SU collects 120 alarms from the Switch Matrix ACU. The alarm set collected are as follows:
Param Al No No 101 IN 1 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 AL 5 AL 6 AL 7 AL 8 IN 9 IN10 IN11 IN12 Signal Name AIS_8M_0_D1 AIS_8M_1_D1 AIS_8M_2_D1 AIS_8M_3_D1 SYNCL_8M_0_D1 SYNCL_8M_1_D1 SYNCL_8M_2_D1 SYNCL_8M_3_D1 BIT11_8M_0_D1 BIT11_8M_1_D1 BIT11_8M_2_D1 BIT11_8M_3_D1 Description AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 0, DIR1 AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 1, DIR1 AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 2, DIR1 AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 3, DIR1 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 0, DIR1 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 1, DIR1 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 2, DIR1 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 3, DIR1 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 0, DIR1 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 1, DIR1 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 2, DIR1 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 3, DIR1
B1078
Rev. Q
139
II Operators Guide
Loss of signal at 34Mb/s protection input channel ALIGN_PLL_ALARM PLL alarm from alignment MAN_SW_EN Manual alignment switch in use ALIGNEDB Alignment indicator. Low=align, High=not align ACTIVE_CH Alignment switch status. low=prot, High=regular. OUT_ALM_REG OUT_ALM_PROT
Param Al No No 113 IN13 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 IN20 IN21 IN22 IN23 IN24 IN25 IN26 IN27 IN28 IN29 IN30 IN31 IN32 IN33 AL34 IN35 IN36 IN37 AL38 AL39 AL40 IN41 IN42 IN43 IN44 AL45 AL46 AL47 AL48 IN49 IN50
Signal Name BIT12_8M_0_D1
Description
NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 0, DIR1 BIT12_8M_1_D1 NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 1, DIR1 BIT12_8M_2_D1 NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 2, DIR1 BIT12_8M_3_D1 NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 3, DIR1 AIS_2M_1_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 1, DIR1 AIS_2M_2_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 2, DIR1 AIS_2M_3_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 3, DIR1 AIS_2M_4_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 4, DIR1 AIS_2M_5_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 5, DIR1 AIS_2M_6_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 6, DIR1 AIS_2M_7_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 7, DIR1 AIS_2M_8_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 8, DIR1 AIS_2M_9_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 9, DIR1 AIS_2M_10_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 10, DIR1 AIS_2M_11_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 11, DIR1 AIS_2M_12_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 12, DIR1 AIS_2M_13_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 13, DIR1 AIS_2M_14_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 14, DIR1 AIS_2M_15_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 15, DIR1 AIS_2M_16_D1 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 16, DIR1 AIS_34M_D1 AIS detected on 34Mb/s, DIR1 SYNCL_34M_D1 Sync loss on 34Mb/s, DIR1 BIT11_34M_O_D1 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 34Mb/s, DIR1 BIT12_34M_O_D1 NU (National Use) bit detected on 34Mb/s, DIR1 VALID_CRC_D1 CRC synchronization on the selected 2Mb/s, DIR1 Spare Spare Spare AIS_8M_0_D2 AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 0, DIR2 AIS_8M_1_D2 AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 1, DIR2 AIS_8M_2_D2 AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 2, DIR2 AIS_8M_3_D2 AIS detected on 8Mb/s tributary 3, DIR2 SYNCL_8M_0_D2 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 0, DIR2 SYNCL_8M_1_D2 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 1, DIR2 SYNCL_8M_2_D2 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 2, DIR2 SYNCL_8M_3_D2 Sync loss on 8Mb/s tributary 3, DIR2 BIT11_8M_0_D2 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 0, DIR2 BIT11_8M_1_D2 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 1, DIR2
B1078 Rev. Q
140
Param Al No No 151 IN51 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 IN52 IN53 IN54 IN55 IN56 IN57 IN58 IN59 IN60 IN61 IN62 IN63 IN64 IN65 IN66 IN67 IN68 IN69 IN70 IN71 IN72 IN73 AL74 IN75 IN76 IN77 AL78 AL79 AL80 IN81 IN82 AL83 AL84
Signal Name BIT11_8M_2_D2
Description
RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 2, DIR2 BIT11_8M_3_D2 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 3, DIR2 BIT12_8M_0_D2 NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 0, DIR2 BIT12_8M_1_D2 NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 1, DIR2 BIT12_8M_2_D2 NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 2, DIR2 BIT12_8M_3_D2 NU (National Use) bit detected on 8Mb/s tributary 3, DIR2 AIS_2M_1_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 1, DIR2 AIS_2M_2_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 2, DIR2 AIS_2M_3_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 3, DIR2 AIS_2M_4_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 4, DIR2 AIS_2M_5_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 5, DIR2 AIS_2M_6_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 6, DIR2 AIS_2M_7_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 7, DIR2 AIS_2M_8_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 8, DIR2 AIS_2M_9_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 9, DIR2 AIS_2M_10_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 10, DIR2 AIS_2M_11_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 11, DIR2 AIS_2M_12_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 12, DIR2 AIS_2M_13_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 13, DIR2 AIS_2M_14_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 14, DIR2 AIS_2M_15_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 15, DIR2 AIS_2M_16_D2 AIS detected on 2Mb/s channel 16, DIR2 AIS_34M_D2 AIS detected on 34Mb/s, DIR2 SYNCL_34M_D2 Sync loss on 34Mb/s, DIR2 BIT11_34M_O_D2 RA (Remote Alarm) bit detected on 34Mb/s, DIR2 BIT12_34M_O_D2 NU (National Use) bit detected on 34Mb/s, DIR2 VALID_CRC_D2 CRC synchronization on the selected 2Mb/s, DIR2 Spare Spare Spare PRBS_SL_D1 Indicates no PRBS data received on the selected 2Mb/s, DIR1 VAL_CRC_D1 CRC synchronization on the selected 2Mb/s, DIR1 Spare LSIG34_P_D1 No signal at 34Mb/s, protection channel, DIR1
B1078
Rev. Q
141
II Operators Guide
Param Al No No 185 AL85 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 AL86 AL87 AL88 AL89 IN90 IN91 AL92 IN93 IN94 AL95 AL96 AL97 AL98 AL99
Signal Name LSIG34_R_D1 OUT_ALM_1_D1 OUT_ALM_2_D1 OUT_ALM_3_D1 OUT_ALM_4_D1 ALIGNED_D1 ACTIVE_CH_D1 MAN_SW_EN_D1 PRBS_SL_D2 VAL_CRC_D2 Spare LSIG34_P_D2 LSIG34_R_D2 OUT_ALM_1_D2 OUT_ALM_2_D2
Description No signal at 34Mb/s, regular channel, DIR1 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, drop channel 1, DIR1 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, drop channel 2, DIR1 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, drop channel 3, DIR1 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, drop channel 4, DIR1 Alignment indicator. Low = aligned, High = not aligned, DIR1 Alignment switch status: Low = prot, High = regular, DIR1 Manual alignment switch in use, DIR1 Indicates no PRBS data received on the selected 2Mb/s, DIR2 CRC synchronization on the selected 2Mb/s, DIR2 No signal at 34Mb/s, protection channel, DIR2 No signal at 34Mb/s, regular channel, DIR2 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, drop channel 1, DIR2 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, drop channel 2, DIR2 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, drop channel 3, DIR2 Loss of signal at 2Mb/s output, drop channel 4, DIR2 Alignment indicator. Low = aligned, High = not aligned, DIR2 Alignment switch status. Low = prot, High = regular, DIR2 Manual alignment switch in use, DIR2 Loss of signal at 34Mb/s output, regular channel, DIR1 Loss of signal at 34Mb/s output, protection channel, DIR1 Loss of signal at 34Mb/s output, regular channel, DIR2 Loss of signal at 34Mb/s output, protection channel, DIR2
AL100 OUT_ALM_3_D2 AL101 OUT_ALM_4_D2 IN102 ALIGNED_D2 IN103 ACTIVE_CH_D2 AL104 MAN_SW_EN_D2 AL105 ALM_REG_D1 AL106 ALM_PRT_D1 AL107 ALM_REG_D2 AL108 ALM_PRT_D2 AL109 Spare AL110 Spare
142
B1078
Rev. Q
Param No 211 212 213* 214* 215* 216* 217* 218* 219* 220*
Al No
Signal Name
Description
AL111 Spare AL112 Spare AL113 LSIG_I_1_D1 AL114 LSIG_I_2_D1 AL115 LSIG_I_3_D1 AL116 LSIG_I_4_D1 AL117 LSIG_I_1_D2 AL118 LSIG_I_2_D2 AL119 LSIG_I_3_D2 AL120 LSIG_I_4_D2
No signal at 2Mb/s input, add channel 1, DIR1 No signal at 2Mb/s input, add channel 2, DIR1 No signal at 2Mb/s input, add channel 3, DIR1 No signal at 2Mb/s input, add channel 4, DIR1 No signal at 2Mb/s input, add channel 1, DIR2 No signal at 2Mb/s input, add channel 2, DIR2 No signal at 2Mb/s input, add channel 3, DIR2 No signal at 2Mb/s input, add channel 4, DIR2
* Marked alarms are adaptive, see para 5.5.2.6 for description.
Table 5-70
Alarm signals, Switch Matrix ACU
The terms D1 and D2 in the alarm names above are defined as in figure below.
Add/Drop Repeater Dir1 Dir2
D1
D1
D2
D2
Switch Matrix
Switch Matrix
Fig. 5-12
B1078 Rev. Q
Description of D1 and D2 in Add/Drop Repeater 143
II Operators Guide
5.5.2.6
Adaptive Alarms
Adaptive alarms are automatically included by the software system. If these alarms are high at power-up, they are not included. An alarm input will not be included until a low to high transition has been detected on that input. From then on the input will behave as an normal input. The alarm input must be low for 10 seconds prior to the low to high transition.
144
B1078
Rev. Q
5.6
Quality Menu (F4)
The quality menu is selected by pressing the [F4] button. The quality parameters, Error Pulses and G.821 can be monitored from the ACU units.
4XDOLW\ 6HF [ 6WD[ ,QWX [ 4XDOLW\ +RXU 8VH(6&(17(5
The ACU internal unit number is described in table 5-3. The ACU quality parameters are described in the table below.
Input parameter 26 (R/W) 27 (R/W) 28 (R/W) 29 (R/W) 30 (R) 32 (R) 36 (R) 40 (R) 44 (R) 48 (R) 50 (R) 52 (R) Display (text line 3) PARhop_res PARsec_res QualPeriod Quality PAR/sec_H PAR-TOT_H UnAvTime_H ErrorSec_H SeversES_H Degr.Min_H PAR/sec_S PAR-TOT_S Description Reset of hop parity error counter Reset of section parity error counter Sets previous or current period Set time interval, 15min, hour, day, month Parity errors per second, unswitched Total number of parity errors since reset, unswitched Unavailable time, unswitched Errored seconds, unswitched Severely errored seconds, unswitched Degraded minutes, unswitched Parity errors per second, switched Total number of parity errors since reset, switched Number of 34Mb/s PRBS errors last second
72 (R/W) 73 (R) Table 5-71
70 (R)
Reset_PRBS PRBStotal
PRBS/sec
Reset of 34Mb/s PRBS error counter Total number of 34Mb/s PRBS errors
ACU Quality Parameters
B1078
Rev. Q
145
II Operators Guide
5.6.1
ACU Quality parameters
5.6.1.1
Quality Period (ACU param 28-29)

These parameters, Quality Period and Quality, set the time period for which the G.821 performance data is displayed. The time periods that can be displayed for G.821 is 15 min, hour, day and month, for previous or current period. The time period follows the real time clock on the station. The parameters are set as follows: Qual Period Value 0 (PREVIOUS) 1 (CURRENT) Table 5-72 Description Previous period, calculations of last complete period Current period, calculations up till now since last complete period
Qual Period Values Description 15 minute G.821 performance data Hourly G.821 performance data Daily G.821 performance data Monthly G.821 performance data
Quality Value 0 (15_MIN) 1 (HOUR) 2 (DAY) 3 (MONTH) Table 5-73
Quality Values
5.6.1.2
Error Counter Reset (ACU param 26-27 and 72)

The parameters that resets the error counters must be used in the following way: When the parameter associated with the error counter you want to reset has been selected, enter "1". The text on line 3 will change to "RESET" and then to "DONE" when the counter has been reset.
146
B1078
Rev. Q
5.7
Test menu (F5)

The test menu is selected by pressing the [F5] button
7HVW 6HF 6WD ,QWX 7HVW&KDQ 8VH(6&(17(5

The SU test parameters control the 34 Mb/s test facilities; looping and PRBS insertion. These parameters are not accessible from remote stations. The test parameters control the 34 Mb/s test facilities on both sides of the hop. The SU test parameters are listed in the table below.
Input Display (text line 3) Parameter (R/W) 90 (R/W) 91 (R/W) 92 (R/W) 93 (R/W) 94 (R/W) 34TestDir: x 34TestChan: x 34LoopType :xxxxxxxx 34Loop: xxxxxxxx 34PRBS: xxxxxxxx Description
Direction for Switch Matrix 34Mb/s test facilities Channel for 34Mb/s test facilities Loop type for 34Mb/s looping Enable/disable 34Mb/s looping Enable/disable 34Mb/s PRBS insertion
Table 5-74
SU Test Parameters
5.7.1.1
34 Mb/s test Direction (SU param 90)

This parameter controls the direction for 34 Mb/s test functions performed on a Switch Matrix unit. The parameter can have the following values:
7HVW'LU SDUDPHWHU 'HVFUL SW LRQ
1 2
Antenna direction 1 Antenna direction 2
Table 5-75
B1078 Rev. Q
34 TestDir Parameters 147
II Operators Guide
5.7.1
SU Test Parameters
5.7.1.2
34 Mb/s Test Channel (SU param 91)

This parameter controls the channel where the 34 Mb/s test facilities are carried out. The parameter can have the following values:
7HVW&KDQ SDUDPHWHU 'H VFUL SWLR Q
0 1 2 3
Protection channel Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Table 5-76
34 TestChan Parameters
5.7.1.3
34 Mb/s Loop Type (SU param 92)

This parameter controls the type of 34 Mb/s looping that can be performed. The parameter can have the following values:
/RRS7\SH SDUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 (IF_TRANS) 1 (IF_MODEM) 2 (BASEBAND) 3 (ALIGN)
Far end IF-loop on transceiver Local IF-loop on modem Baseband loop on Bit Insert/Extract unit Alignment loop on Alignment unit, Mux/ Demux unit or Switch Matrix unit
Table 5-77
34 LoopType Parameters
,)PRGHPORRS
The different loop types are shown below:

%DVHEDQ GORRS
RCVR
Demod
Bit Extract
$OLJQPHQWORRS0EV
Ch1
XMTR Mod Bit Insert
,)WUDQVFHLYHUORR S
Branch 1+1
Alignment Switch
$OLJQPHQWORRS [0EV
RCVR
Demod
Bit Extract
ChP
XMTR
Mod
Bit Insert
Figure 5-13 Loop types 148

B1078 Rev. Q
The directions for the alignment looping on the Switch Matrix units are shown in the figure below:
$GG'URS5HSHDWHU
7RZDUGV 0DVWHU7HUPLQDO 7RZDUGV 6ODYH7HUPLQDO
6ZLWFK0DWUL[XQLW
0EV
[0EV
0EV
3URWHFWLRQ 0EV
3URWHFWLRQ 0EV
5HJXODU 0EV
5HJXODU 0EV
3URWHFWLRQ 0EV
[0EV
3URWHFWLRQ 0EV
0EVORRS'LU
0EVORRS'LU
Fig. 5-14
34 Mb/s alignment looping on Switch Matrix Unit
5.7.1.4
34 Mb/s Loop (SU param 93)

34 Mb/s looping can be performed with this parameter. The parameter can have the following values:
B1078
Rev. Q
149
II Operators Guide
5HJXODU
5HJXODU
/RRS
SDUDPHWHU
'HVFULSWLRQ
0 (DISABLED) 1 (LOCAL) 2 (FAR_END) TIMEOUT PC_CTRL
34Mb/s looping is disabled on both sides of the hop. 34Mb/s looping is enabled on own station. 34Mb/s looping is enabled on the station on the other side of the hop. A loop has been removed due to lack of refresh from the other side of the hop. A PC running Network Element vieW is connected locally or on the other side of the hop. 34Mb/s test facilities are not available from HHT until the PC is disconnected.
Table 5-78
34Loop Parameters
5.7.1.5
34 Mb/s PRBS (SU param 94)

34 Mb/s PRBS can be inserted in the selected channel's transmitter switch with this parameter. The parameter can have the following values:
35%6 SDUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 (DISABLED) 1 (LOCAL) 2 (FAR_END) TIMEOUT PC_CTRL
34Mb/s PRBS insertion is disabled on both sides of the hop. 34Mb/s PRBS insertion is enabled on own station. 34Mb/s PRBS insertion is enabled on the station on the other side of the hop. PRBS insertion has been removed due to lack of refresh from the other side of the hop. A PC running Network Element vieW is connected locally or on the other side of the hop. 34Mb/s test facilities are not available from HHT until the PC is disconnected.
Table 5-79
34PRBS Parameters
150
B1078
Rev. Q
To display PRBS errors received in the bitextract on a 34Mb/s channel, select Intu according to table 5-3 and select the PRBS items described in chapter 5.7.1. The results of the PRBS error check is displayed as PRBS errors per second and total errors since counter reset. The counter can be reset manually from HHT or is automatically reset when the BIT ACU is reset. If the number of PRBS errors per second exceeds 65535, the exact number will be added to the total value but the per second value will show 65535.
The ACU test parameters controls looping of the 2 Mb/s wayside traffic. The ACU test parameters are listed in the table below.
Input Parameter Display (text line 3) Description (R/W) 13 (R/W) 2MbWayLoop: xxxxxxxx 2MbLoopAdp: xxxxxxxx
ACU Test Parameters
Enable/disable of 2Mb/s wayside looping on Bit Insert/Extract unit. Enable/disable of 2Mb/s wayside looping on 2Mb/s adapter.
14 (R/W)
Table 5-80
5.7.2.1
2 Mb/s Wayside Loop on Bit Insert/Extract Unit (ACU param 13)

2 Mb/s wayside loop on Bit Insert/Extract unit from bitextract to bitinsert can be performed with this parameter. The parameter can have the following values:
2MbWayLoop parameter 0 (DISABLED) 1 (ENABLED)

Table 5-81
Description 2Mb/s wayside loop on Bit Insert/Extract unit is enabled on the selected channel. 2Mb/s wayside loop on Bit Insert/Extract unit is disabled on the selected channel.
2Mb Way Loop Parameters
B1078
Rev. Q
151
II Operators Guide
5.7.2
ACU Test Parameters
5.7.2.2
2 Mb/s Wayside Loop on 2 Mb/s Adapter (ACU param 14)

2 Mb/s wayside loop on 2 Mb/s adapter from alignment switch to hybrid splitter can be performed with this parameter. The parameter can have the following values:
2MbLoopAdp parame te r 0 (DISABLED) 1 (ENABLED) De scription 2Mb/s wayside loop on 2Mb/s adapter is enabled on the selected channel. 2Mb/s wayside loop on 2Mb/s adapter is disabled on the selected channel.
Table 5-82
2Mb LoopAdp Parameters
5.7.3
16x2 Mb/s ACU Test Parameters

The 16x2 Mb/s ACU test parameters controls the 16x2 Mb/s test facilities: 2Mb/s looping, PRBS insertion and check, CRC-4 check. These parameters are only available for Mux/Demux or Switch Matrix units (Intu: 12-13). The 16x2Mb/s ACU test parameters are listed in the table below.
,QSXW 3DUDP 5: 'LVSOD\ WH[W OLQH 'HVFULSWLRQ
14 (R/W) 15 (R/W) 16 (R/W) 17 (R/W) 18 (R) 20 (R/W) 21 (R) 25 (R/W) 26 (R) 28 (R/W) 29 (R)
2_TestDir: x 2_TestCh: x 2_TestFunc: xxxxxxxx
Direction for Switch Matrix test facilities Channel for 16x2Mb/s test facilities (1-16) 16x2Mb/s test facility selection
PRBS_Check: xxxxxxxx Enable/disable 2Mb/s PRBS check PRBS/sec: xxxxx PRBS_reset: xxxxx Number of 2Mb/s PRBS errors last second Reset of 2Mb/s PRBS total error counter
PRBS_total: xxxxxxxxxx Total number of 2Mb/s PRBS errors CRC_Check: xxxxxxxx CRC/sec: xxxxx CRC_reset: xxxxx CRC_total: xxxxxxxxxx Enable/disable CRC-4 check Number of CRC-4 errors last second Reset of CRC-4 total error counter Total number of CRC-4 errors
Table 5-83 152
16x2Mb ACU Test Parameters

B1078 Rev. Q
5.7.3.1
2 Mb/s Test Direction (16x2 ACU param 14)

This parameter controls the direction for 16x2 Mb/s test functions performed on a Switch Matrix unit. The parameter can have the following values:
B7HVW'LU SDUDPHWHU 'HVFUL SW LRQ
1 2
Antenna direction 1 Antenna direction 2
5.7.3.2
2 Mb/s Test Channel (16x2 ACU param 15)

This parameter controls the 2 Mb/s channel where the 16x2 Mb/s test facilities are carried out. The parameter can have the following values:
B7HVW&KDQ SDUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWL RQ
1-16
2Mb/s channel 1-16
Table 5-85
2_TestChan Parameters
5.7.3.3
2Mb/s Test Function (16x2 ACU param 16)

16x2Mb/s test facilities can be performed with this parameter. The parameter can have the following values:
2_Te stFunc parame te r 0 (DISABLED) 1 (LOOPING) 2 (PRBS_INS) PC_CTRL
De scription 16x2Mb/s test functions are disabled. A 2Mb/s loop is enabled on own station. 2Mb/s PRBS insertion is enabled on own station. A PC running Network Element vieW is connected locally or on the other side of the hop. 16x2Mb/s test fascilities are not available from HHT until the PC is disconnected.
Table 5-86
2_TestFunc Parameters
B1078
Rev. Q
153
II Operators Guide
Table 5-84
2_TestDir Parameters
5.7.3.4
2Mb/s Looping (16x2 ACU param 16)

Looping can be performed on one of the sixteen 2Mb/s channels from demux part to the mux part of Mux/Demux and Switch Matrix units. 2Mb/s looping on Mux/Demux unit is shown in fig.5-15, and 2Mb/s looping on Switch Matrix unit in Dir1 and Dir2 is shown in fig. 5-16.
7HUPLQDO
0X['HPX[XQLW
7RZDUGV 1H[W6WDWLRQ

0EV
[0EV
5HJXODU
0X[
16
0EV
Splitter
0EV

3URWHFWLRQ 0EV

Alignment

0EV
0EV
5HJXODU
0EV
'HPX[
16
0EV [0EV

3URWHFWLRQ 0EV
0EVORRS
Fig. 5-15
2 Mb/s looping on Mux/Demux Unit
7RZDUGV 0DVWHU7HUPLQDO
$GG'URS5HSHDWHU
7RZDUGV 6ODYH7HUPLQDO
6ZLWFK0DWUL[XQLW
5HJXODU
Alignment
0EV 'HPX[
[0EV
5HJXODU
0X[
3URWHFWLRQ 0EV
6ZLWFK 0DWUL[
Splitter Alignment
0EV
3URWHFWLRQ 0EV
5HJXODU
Splitter
0EV
0EV
0EV
5HJXODU
0EV
0X[
6ZLWFK 0DWUL[ [0EV
'HPX[
3URWHFWLRQ 0EV
3URWHFWLRQ 0EV
0EVORRS'LU
0EVORRS'LU
Fig. 5-16 154
2 Mb/s looping on Switch Matrix Unit

B1078 Rev. Q
5.7.3.5
PRBS Insertion and Check (16x2 ACU param 16-21)

PRBS can be inserted on one of the sixteen 2Mb/s channels in the mux part of Mux/Demux and Switch Matrix units. Selecting Dir1 for PRBS insertion on Switch Matrix unit will insert PRBS in the traffic towards the Master Terminal, and selecting Dir2 will insert PRBS in the traffic towards the Slave Terminal. One of the sixteen 2Mb/s channels can be checked for PRBS errors in the demux part of Mux/Demux and Switch Matrix units. Selecting Dir1 for PRBS check on Switch Matrix unit will check for PRBS errors in the traffic from the Master Terminal, and selecting Dir2 will check for PRBS errors in the traffic from the Slave Terminal. The results of the PRBS error check is displayed as PRBS errors per second and total errors since counter reset. The counter can be reset manually from HHT. It is automatically reset when PRBS check gets enabled, when the 2Mb/s test channel is changed or when the MUX ACU or SWM ACU is reset. If the number of PRBS errors per second exceeds 65535, the exact number will be added to the total value but the per second value will show 65535. See figs. 5-17 and 5-18.
5.7.3.6
CRC-4 Check (16x2 ACU param 25-29)

One of the sixteen 2Mb/s channels can be checked for CRC-4 errors in the mux part of Mux/Demux and Switch Matrix units. Selecting Dir1 for CRC4 check on Switch Matrix unit will check for CRC-4 errors in the traffic towards the Master Terminal, and selecting Dir2 will check for CRC-4 errors in the traffic towards the Slave Terminal. The results of the CRC-4 error check is displayed as CRC-4 errors per second and total errors since counter reset. The counter can be reset manually. It is automatically reset when CRC-4 check gets enabled, when the 2Mb/s test channel is changed or when the MUX ACU or SWM ACU is reset. See figs. 5-17 and 5-18.
B1078
Rev. Q
155
II Operators Guide
7HUPLQDO
35%6LQVHUW &5&FKHFN 0X['HPX[XQLW
7RZDUGV 1H[W6WDWLRQ

[0EV
5HJXODU
16
0EV
0X[
Splitter Alignment
0EV
0EV

3URWHFWLR Q 0EV
5HJXODU

0EV 'HPX[
0EV
16
0EV

[0EV
3URWHFWLR Q 0EV
35%6FKHFN
Fig. 5-17
PRBS check, PRBS insert and CRC-4 check on Mux/Demux unit
7RZDUGV 0DVWH U7HUPLQDO
$GG'URS5HSHDWHU
7RZDUGV 6ODYH7HUPLQDO
6ZLWFK0DWUL[XQLW
35%6LQVHUW'LU 35%6FKHFN'LU &5&FKHFN'LU
5HJXODU
[0EV
5HJXODU
0X[
Alignment
'HPX[
6Z LWFK
3URWHFW LRQ
16
0DWUL[
16
Splitter Alignment
0EV
0EV
3URWHFW LR Q
0EV
0EV
5HJXODU
0EV
5HJXODU
Splitter
0EV
0X[
6Z LWFK
3URWHFW LRQ
16
0DW UL[
'HPX[
16
3URWHFW LR Q
0EV
[0EV
0EV
35%6LQVHUW'LU &5&FKHFN'LU
35%6FKHFN'LU
Fig. 5-18
PRBS check, PRBS insert and CRC-4 check on Switch Matrix unit
156
B1078
Rev. Q
5.7.3.7
Reset of PRBS/CRC-4 Error Counters (16x2 ACU param 20 and 28)

The parameters that resets the error counters must be used in the following way. When the parameter associated with the error counter you want to reset has been selected, enter 1. The text on line 3 will change to RESET and then to DONE when the counter has been reset.
The password menu is selected by pressing the [F8] button.
Password Sec:1 Sta: 1 Intu: 1 Connected: 0xnnnn Use: 0-9. (ESC)(ENTER)

There are defined 4 levels of password, where level 3 is the highest level. Level 0 is read only. Level 0 1 2 3 Table 5-87 Description Public access, read only. Maintenance access, configuration parameters, i.e. alarm defaults. Supervisor access, control manual switching, RMT reset, RTC System access, setup switching parameters. Password Levels
When entering a level which requires password, the user is prompted for the right password level. When the user has finished the work at the HHT, he/she should always return to the start-up picture by pressing the F7 key. This will prevent unauthorized personnel from entering wrong inputs. However, if any key has not been activated for 5 minutes, the HHT will automatically return to the start-up picture.
B1078
Rev. Q
157
II Operators Guide
5.8
Password Menu (F8)
To change a password, the user needs to know the one level higher password in order to change this password. The different password levels have the following input parameters: Password level 0 1 2 3 Current level Table 5-88 Input parameter 216 220 224 228 236 Password change level 0 read only 2 3 3 0 read only Number of digits not used 4 5 6 1
Password Input Parameters
Note! All passwords are set to 0 by the manufacturer. If the level 3 password is lost contact the manufacturer.
158
B1078
Rev. Q
5.9 5.9.1
Alarm Adapter Unit AAU Parameters

The AAU internal unit number (1-7) is described in table 5-3.
The parameter NoAAUs, see para 5.3.1.6, on the SU, must be set before the AAUs can be accessed. The AAU parameters are grouped together in 3 different groups. Group 1 2 3 Table 5-89 Parameter no 6 16 - 31 101-166 AAU Input Parameter Groups Display text
AAU_status: 0xn0 n1 AAU_type Rel (n)_mod: Latched/pulsed Rel (n)_def: Open/closed Rel (n)_tim:nn Rel (n)_sta:On/Off Alm (n)_sta:On/Off Alm (n)_def:High/Low SW Release
Description AAU status Relay parameters Alarm parameters
Parameter no (R/W)
6 (R) 7 (R) 16, 20, 24, 28 (R/W) 17, 21, 25, 29 (R/W) 18, 22, 26, 30 (R/W) 19, 23, 27, 31 (R) 101 - 116 (R) 151 - 166 (R/W) 237 (R)
Description
The parameter is not used The parameter is not used Displays the relay mode, Latched="0", Pulsed="1" Displays the relay default, Closed= "0", Open="1" Displays the relay timeout only valid for pulsed mode, 0-127.5 sec. in steps of 0.5 sec. Displays the relay status. Displays the alarm status, ON=Alarm, OFF=NO Alarm Displays the alarm default, Default input gives NO Alarm The software revision on the unit
Table 5-90
AAU Input Parameter
B1078
Rev. Q
159
II Operators Guide
&RQILJXUDWLRQ 6HF 6WD ,QWX [ $$8BVWDWXV [QQ 8VH(6&(17(5
5.9.1.1 5.9.1.1.1
Relay Operation Relay Mode (AAU param 16, 20, 24, 28)
The Relay Mode can be set using parameters 16, 20, 24, 28 on the chosen AAU. The Relay Mode can be either latched or pulsed. The following table shows the AAU Relay Mode parameters: Input parameter 16 20 24 28 Table 5-91 Relay number 1 2 3 4 Description Relay 1 is Latched/Pulsed Relay 2 is Latched/Pulsed Relay 3 is Latched/Pulsed Relay 4 is Latched/Pulsed
AAU Relay Mode Parameters
The following table shows the input values for changing the Relay Mode: Input value n 0 1 Table 5-92 Display text Rel (x)_mod:Latched Rel (x)_mod:Pulsed Description Select latched relay Select pulsed relay
AAU Relay Mode Input Values
5.9.1.1.2
Relay Default position (AAU param 17, 21, 25, 29)

The relay default position can be set using parameters 17, 21, 25, 29 on the chosen AAU. The relay default can be either closed or open. The following table shows the AAU relay default parameters: Input parameter 17 21 25 29 Table 5-93 Relay number 1 2 3 4 Description Relay 1 is default OPEN/CLOSED Relay 2 is default OPEN/CLOSED Relay 3 is default OPEN/CLOSED Relay 4 is default OPEN/CLOSED
AAU Relay Default Parameters
160
B1078
Rev. Q
The following table shows the input values for changing the relay default position: Input value n 0 1 Table 5-94 Display text Rel (x)_def:CLOSED Rel (x)_def:OPEN AAU Relay Default Input Values
II Operators Guide
Description Select relay as default CLOSED Select relay as default OPEN
5.9.1.1.3
Relay Timeout/Operation (AAU param 18, 22, 26, 30)

Operation of the relay is done using the parameters 18, 22, 26 and 30 on the chosen AAU. In pulsed mode, setting this parameter results in a pulse on the relay of specified length. In latched mode the relay can be set either ON or OFF. The following table shows the AAU relay timeout parameters: Input parameter 18 22 26 30 Table 5-95 Relay number 1 2 3 4 Description Relay 1 timeout value, 0-127.5 sec. in steps of 0.5 sec. Relay 2 timeout value, 0-127.5 sec. in steps of 0.5 sec. Relay 3 timeout value, 0-127.5 sec. in steps of 0.5 sec. Relay 4 timeout value, 0-127.5 sec. in steps of 0.5 sec.
AAU Relay Timeout Parameters
In pulsed mode the parameter can take the value from 0 to 255, where each step is 0.5 s. For example setting this parameter to 10 will result in a relay pulse of 5 seconds. The following table shows the input values in pulsed mode: Input Value 0-255 Table 5-96
B1078 Rev. Q
Display text Rel(x)_tim:n
Description Relay timeout value 0-127.5 seconds
AAU Pulsed Relay Input Values 161
In latched mode the parameter can take the following values: Input Value 0 1 2 Table 5-97 Display text Rel(x)_tim:0 Rel(x)_tim:1 Rel(x)_tim:2 Description Relay set OFF Relay set ON The relay is toggled
AAU Latched Relay Input Values
5.9.1.1.4
Relay Status (AAU param 19, 23, 27, 31)

The relay status can be displayed by using parameters 19, 23, 27 and 31 on the chosen AAU. The relay status can be either ON or OFF. The actual relay position, open or closed, is dependent on the setting of the parameter Rel(x)_def. The following table shows the AAU relay status parameters: Input parameter 19 23 27 31 Table 5-98 Relay number 1 2 3 4 Description Relay 1 status is ON/OFF Relay 2 status is ON/OFF Relay 3 status is ON/OFF Relay 4 status is ON/OFF
AAU Relay Status Parameters
5.9.1.2 5.9.1.2.1
Alarm Parameters Alarm Defaults (AAU param 151-160)

The AAU alarm default value can be set using parameters 151-160 on the chosen AAU. The default value is defined as the normal, no alarm state, of the alarm input. For example, setting the alarm default to HIGH will result in a low input being reported as an alarm. The alarm default parameter can have the following values: Input value n 0 1 Table 5-99 Display text Alm (x)_def:LOW Alm (x)_def:HIGH Description Alarm default is set LOW Alarm default is set HIGH
AAU Alarm Default Values
162
B1078
Rev. Q
5.9.1.2.2
Alarm Status (AAU param 101-116)

The AAU alarm status can be displayed using parameters 101-116 on the chosen AAU. The Alarm status can be either ON or OFF depending on the alarm input signal and the alarm default setting.
5.9.1.3
Software Release (AAU param 237)

This parameter shows the revision of the software on the Alarm Adapter Unit. The AAU must have software revision R4B or later to get the correct revision code on the HHT. The HHT will show "unknown" on the display if the AAU has revision R4A or earlier.
B1078
Rev. Q
163
II Operators Guide
5.10 5.10.1
Examples Network Configuration

The internal supervisory system can handle network configurations of up to 128 sections with maximum 16 SUs in each section.
5.10.2
Network Routing Table Configuration

To be able to route messages between different sections within a network each SU is given a unique routing table. The table contains information of which serial port to select for the different sections. The following table gives an overview of the available network connections. Port Name Link A Link B Net A Net B Disable Port Number Input Value Readout Value 0 0x00 1 0x01 2 0x02 3 0x03 16 0x10 Description 64 kb/s insert channel A 64 kb/s insert channel B Network Interface A Network Interface B Disable section from network, or own section number.
Table 5-100 The following table shows the parameters for network routing configuration. Input Parameter 32 - 47 (R/W) 100 - 211 (R/W) Table 5-101 Section Number 1 - 16 17 - 128
164
B1078
Rev. Q
5.10.2.1
Network Routing Table Configuration Example

The following figure gives an example of how the network routing table parameters should be configured.
H Y D O 6 O D Q L V E 0 $ N Q L /
Q R L W F H Q Q R $ $ N N & Q L Q R L 1 / / [ [ [ Q Q Q R R L R L L W W W F F F H H H 6 6 6 Q R L W F H Q Q R & R 1 [ Q R L W F H 6

P [ U H 7
H Y D O
V E 6 0 O D [ Q L P U H 7
$ N Q L /
Q R L W F H Q Q $ R $ N & N Q R Q L L / 1 / [ [ [ Q Q Q R R R L L L W W W F F F H H H 6 6 6
Q R L W F H Q Q R & R 1 [ Q R L W F H 6
Q R L W F H 6
U H W D H S H 5 S R U ' G G $
% N Q L /
V E 0 [
$ N Q L /

Q R L W F H Q Q R $ $ N N & Q R Q L L 1 / / [ [ [ Q R L W F H 6 Q R L W F H 6 Q R L W F H 6
Q R L W F H 6
$ N Q L / U H W D H V S E H 0 5 S [ R U ' G G $
% W H 1

Q R L W F H Q Q R % & $ W W H R H 1 1 1 [ [ [ Q Q Q R R R L L L W W W F F F H H H 6 6 6
$ N Q L /
% W H 1
$ W H 1
Q R L W F H Q Q R $ & W R H 1 1 [ [ Q R L W F H 6 Q R L W F H 6 Q R L W F H Q Q R $ & W H R 1 1 [ [ Q R L W F H 6 Q R L W F H 6
$ W H 1
U H W V D 0 O D Q L
Q R L W F H Q Q R % & % W W H H R 1 1 1 [ [ [ Q Q Q R R R L L L W W W F F F H H H 6 6 6
8 6 G Q D F H 6 V V H U G G D V Q D H
$ N Q L /
V E 0 [ P U H 7
P
Q R L W F H 6
H F D I U H W Q , N U R Z W H 1
H O E D &
U H W V D
$ N Q L /
V E 0 [ P U H 7 0 O D Q L
Q R L W F H Q Q R $ $ & N N Q L Q R L

1 [
/ [ Q Q R R L L W W F F H H 6 6
R 1 [ Q Q R L R L W W F F H H 6 6 / [
Q R L W F H Q Q R &
Note! Network connection between 34/16x2 Mb/s and 4x2 Mb/s is only possible with upgraded 4x2 Mb/s equipment, NL18x-A. Fig. 5-19
B1078 Rev. Q
165
II Operators Guide
5.10.3
Network Serial Port Configuration.

The configuration of NetA and NetB network ports are done using the parameters in the following table. When a network port e.g. NetA, is connected to another SU, the address of that SU is entered in parameter NetA_SU and NetA_Sec. These parameters must be entered to get correct operation of Bypass 352kb/s function and Network Element vieW on PC. Input Parameter 20 (R/W) 21 (R/W) 22 (R/W) 23 (R/W) Table 5-102 Set parameter 20-21 or 22-23 to 0 if specific network port is not connected to other SUs. Value 0-16 0-128 0-16 0-128 Description NetA_SU : SU address of connected station on network port A NetA_SEC: Section address of connected station on network port A NetB_SU : SU address of connected station on network port B NetB_SEC: Section address of connected station on network port B
166
B1078
Rev. Q
5.10.3.1
B1078
Q R L W F H 6 Q R L W F H 6
Rev. Q
Add/Drop Repeater 34/16x2 Mb/s Terminal Slave 34/16x2 Mb/s LinkA NetA (1,2) 20: NetA_SU : 1 21: NetA_Sec: 2 22: NetB_SU : 0 23: NetB_Sec: 0 20: NetA_SU : 1 21: NetA_Sec: 3 22: NetB_SU : 2 23: NetB_Sec: 1 20: NetA_SU : 0 21: NetA_Sec: 0 22: NetB_SU : 0 23: NetB_Sec: 0 NetA (2,2) (2,1) NetB LinkA LinkA
Add/Drop Repeater 4x2 Mb/s
Q R L W F H 6
Network Serial Port Configuration Example
Fig. 5-20
Terminal Slave 4x2 Mb/s LinkA LinkB LinkA LinkA Terminal Master 4x2 Mb/s (3,1) 20: NetA_SU : 0 21: NetA_Sec: 0 22: NetB_SU : 1 23: NetB_Sec: 2 NetB
(3,2) 20: NetA_SU : 0 21: NetA_Sec: 0 22: NetB_SU : 0 23: NetB_Sec: 0
Terminal Master 34/16x2 Mb/s
LinkA
(1,1)
20: NetA_SU : 0 21: NetA_Sec: 0 22: NetB_SU : 0 23: NetB_Sec: 0
(3,3) 20: NetA_SU : 0 21: NetA_Sec: 0 22: NetB_SU : 0 23: NetB_Sec: 0
(1,2) means address Sec:1 and SU:2
Note: Network connection between 34 / 16x2 Mb/s and 4x2 Mb/s is only possible with upgraded 4x2 Mb/s equipment, NL18x-A
The following figure gives an example of how the network serial port parameters should be configured.
Network Interface Cable
167
II Operators Guide
5.10.4
Manual Switching
1. Enter channel number Move the cursor to line 3 of the display, push the desired input parameter and then [ENTER]. If input parameter 71 is entered the following picture will be displayed: Press [ENTER] again and the following picture will be displayed:
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ&KDQQHO Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 3DVVZ Input password. 6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX ,QSXW Change parameter.
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ&KDQQHO Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
Input the correct level 2 password and press [ENTER], the following picture will be displayed:
Now you can enter the channel you wish to switch manually. For valid inputs see table 546. If 1 is entered (for Channel 1) and then [ENTER] the following picture will be displayed: 2. Enter manual switching priority To enter the priority for the manual switching, press the button to get to the next item (72). The following picture will be displayed: 168
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ3UL /2: Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)

B1078 Rev. Q
Press [ENTER] and the following picture will be displayed:
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX ,QSXW Change parameter.

6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ3UL +,*+ Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
3. Enter manual switching mode To enter the mode for the manual switching, press the button to get to the next item (73). The following picture will be displayed:
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ0RGH +,7/(66 Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
Press [ENTER] and the following picture will be displayed:

6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ0RGH )25&(' Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
Now you can enter the manual switching mode. For valid input see table 5-48. If 1 is entered (for forced switching) and then [ENTER] the following picture will be displayed:
B1078
Rev. Q
169
II Operators Guide
Now you can enter the manual switching priority. For valid input see table 5-47. If 1 is entered (for high priority) and then [ENTER] the following picture will be displayed:
4. Enter manual switching action To enter the manual switching action you want to carry out, press the button to get to the next item (74). The following picture will be displayed: Press [ENTER] and the following picture will be displayed:
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ$FWLRQ5(6725( Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER) 6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX ,QSXW Change parameter. 6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ$FWLRQ6:,7&+ Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
Now you can enter the manual switching action. For valid input see table 5-49. If 1 is entered (for switch) and then [ENTER] the following picture will be displayed: You have now carried out the manual switching and must check if it was successful. 5. Check manual switching error code To check the manual switching error code, press the button to get to the next item (75). The following picture will be displayed: Then check the error code with table 5-50 to see how the manual switching completed. (0 as in this case means that the manual switching completed OK). If the manual switching completed OK, check that Channel P is manually switched in Rx direction. 170
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ(UURU Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
B1078
Rev. Q
6. Verify that Channel P is manually switched in Rx direction To verify that Channel P is manually switched in Rx direction, press the button to get to the next item (76). The following picture will be displayed: The parameter should now show YES (if the manual switching error code was 0).
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 3URW5[0DQO <(6 Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
7. Verify that Channel P is used by the manually switched channel in Rx direction. To verify that Channel P is used by the manually switched channel in Rx direction, press the button to get to the next item (77). The following picture will be displayed: The parameter should now show 1 (which was the channel that was selected as ManChannel). 8. Verify warning message in startup picture. To verify that the warning message for high priority manual switching is displayed in the startup picture, press [F7]. The following picture will be displayed (dependent on system and station setup): We can now conclude that a successful manual switching has taken place.
B1078 Rev. Q
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 3URW5[7UDI Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
6XSHUYLVRU\ 6\VWHP 0EV 0DVWHU 7HUPLQDO &K ORFNHG WR &K3
171
II Operators Guide
5.10.5
Manual Reswitching
1. Select Security menu. Press [F2] and the following picture will be displayed: The section and station numbers and the connected status depends on the station setup. 2. Enter manual switching action Enter input parameter 74 and then [ENTER]. The following picture will be displayed:
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX &RQQHFWHG [) Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ$FWLRQ6:,7&+ Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
Press [ENTER] again and the following picture will be displayed:
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 3DVVZ Input password.

6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ$FWLRQ5(6725( Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
B1078 Rev. Q
Input the correct level 2 password and press [ENTER], the following picture will be displayed:
Now you can enter the manual switching action. For valid input see table 5-49. If 0 is entered (for reswitch) and then [ENTER] the following picture will be displayed: 172
You have now carried out the manual reswitching and must check if it was successful. 3. Check manual reswitching error code To check the manual reswitching error code, press the button to get to the next item (75). The following picture will be displayed: Then check the error code with table 5-50 to see how the manual reswitching completed. (0 as in this case means that the manual reswitching completed OK). If the manual reswitching completed OK, check that Channel P is not manually switched in Rx direction. 4. Verify that Channel P is not manually switched in Rx direction To verify that Channel P is not manually switched in Rx direction, press the button to get to the next item (76). The following picture will be displayed: The parameter should now show NO (if the manual reswitching error code was 0). We can now conclude that a successful manual reswitching has taken place.
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 3URW5[0DQO 12 Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
B1078
Rev. Q
173
II Operators Guide
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 0DQ(UURU Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
5.10.6
Example 3, Configuration of Occasional Traffic

1. Enter standby channel Move the cursor to line 3 of the display, push the desired input parameter and then [ENTER]. If input parameter 60 is entered, the following picture will be displayed: Press [ENTER] again and the following picture will be displayed:
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 6WDQGE\&K Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 3DVVZ Input password. 6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX ,QSXW Change parameter.
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 6WDQGE\&K Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)
Input the correct level 3 password and press (ENTER], the following picture will be displayed:
Now standby channel can be entered. Enter "0" for occasional traffic and then [ENTER]. The following picture will be displayed:
2. Verify that Channel P is used for occasional traffic in Rx direction (if no regular channel switched) To verify that channel P is used for occasional traffic in Rx direction, enter 77 on line 3 of the display and then [ENTER]. The following picture will be displayed: 174
6HFXULW\ 6HF 6WD ,QWX 3URW5[7UDI Use:0-9.(ESC)(ENTER)

B1078 Rev. Q
The parameter should now show "0" which indicates occasional traffic. It can now be concluded that the system has been successfully configured with occasional traffic in Rx direction.
After selecting the Password menu (F8) the input parameter is entered by moving the cursor to the line 3 of the display, and enter the input parameter. When input parameter 220 is entered and the [ENTER] button is pressed, the following picture will be displayed:
Password Sec:1 Sta: 1 Intu: 0 Input: 132 Passw (1): (secret) Change param no. Use: 0-9. (ESC)(ENTER)
Password Sec:1 Sta: 1 Intu: 0 Passw(2): _ Input passw ord.
To change the password, the user must first enter the old password before entering the new one. This is done by pressing the [ENTER] button with the cursor positioned on line 3. The following picture will be displayed: If the wrong password is entered, line 4 will display Wrong password and the HHT will give a short sound. After entering the old password, the command is executed by pressing the [ENTER] button. The following picture will be displayed:
Password Sec: 1 Sta: 1 Intu: 0 Input: 9999 Change param no.
B1078
Rev. Q
175
II Operators Guide
5.10.7
Example 4, Changing the Password
In this example, the selected password is 9999. The command is executed by pressing the [ENTER] button and the following picture will be displayed: The same procedure is followed for all levels of password.
Password Sec:1 Sta: 1 Intu: 0 Passw(1): (secret) Use: 0-9. (ESC)(ENTER)
176
B1078
Rev. Q
Appendix 1
The following is a description of software versions for the 34 Mb/s / 16x2 Mb/s Radio-Relay system. Each system contains different units with belonging programs. Abbreviations: SU: ACU: AAU: SIC: BIT ACU: MUX ACU: SWM ACU: Supervisory Unit Alarm Collection Unit Alarm Adapter Unit Serial Interface Controller (part of the Nera TELE SCADA system) ACU on Bit Insert/Extract Unit ACU on Mux/Demux Unit ACU on Switch Matrix Unit
Software System Releases The various units must have the following software versions or later: SU R6A BIT ACU R7A MUX ACU R7A SWM ACU R2A AAU R4B
This version of the Operator's Guide refers to software revision R6A on the SU.
B1078
Rev. Q
177
II Operators Guide

178
B1078 Rev. Q
sECTION III
Configuration
III Configuration
B1078 Rev. R
179

180
B1078 Rev. R
1.0
General
The 34 Mb/s radio-relay system can be set-up in different configurations. This is done by means of DIL-switches and strappings located on different modules as described in the following.
2.0
Modem, 8MDN77B
J1 J2
6 5 4
W16
6 5 4 1 2 3 1 2 3
W15 W17
2 1
W18
1 2 3
2 1 1 2
1 2
W5 W13
1 2 3
W7 W6
1 2 3
W12 W11
1 2
S5
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
W4
W3 W 2 W8
6 5 4
W10
2 1
1 2 3
S9
1 2 3
W20
1 2 3
W19
P2
P1
S5 Reference for ATPC-control Manual setting of XMTR output power SU control Modem 34 Mb/s, board 8MDN77B
B1078 Rev. R
S9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
1 2
Setting of functions In VLSI circuit IC10. The switches are preset in factory.
181
III Configuration
W9
W21
2.1
Straps
Strap Position Function W13 1-2 Test of VCO 2-3 Normal position W15 1-6 (ON) Data+ Clk is looped from Modulator to ModDemodulator. J2 is blocked em 2-5 (NORM) Normal modem operation. Remote Loop control of "Modem Loop" from SU is possible 3-4 (OFF) Normal modem operation. Remote control of "Modem Loop" from SU not possible W16 1-6 (ON) Signal is strapped from J2 to J1. IF out from IFModulator is blocked Loop 2-5 (NORM) Normal modem operation. Remote control of "Transceiver-Loop" from SU is possible 3-4 (OFF) Normal modem operation. Remote control of "Transceiver-Loop" from SU not possible W17 1-2 Normal position 2-3 Test (when Bit Insert/Extract, 2CN64A is removed) W18 1-2 XMTR output power can be set by S5-2, S5-3 and S5-4 2-3 Normal ATPC operation W19 1-2 Test (Reset of VLSI) 2-3 Normal operation W20 1-2 Test (Reset of VLSI) 2-3 Normal operation
182
B1078
Rev. R
2.2
DIL-Switch Settings
S5-1 ON OFF S5-2 (lsb) ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Function XMTR output power controlled by W18 XMTR output power controlled by SU S5-3 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF S5-4 (msb) ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Fuction MAX. XMTR output power
MIN. XMTR output power

III Configuration
S5-5 OFF
S5-6 OFF
S5-7 ON
Function Switch setting only relevant for full ATPC control, and has to be set individually on each station
2.3
Coaxial connectors
J1 J2 IF OUT, 70 MHz IF INP, 70 MHz
B1078
Rev. R
183
3.0
Bit Insert/Extract/ACU, 2CN64B

W205 1 2 3 1 2 W204
OFF 0 1 0 1
S302
S203
S202 S201
ON
S301
ON
ON
S301
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
S303
S303
Bit Insert/Extract/ACU 2CN64B 184

B1078 Rev. R
P2
J1
P1
3.1
Straps
6WUDS
W204
3RVLWLRQ
1-2 OPEN
)XQFWLRQ
Enables "E_WARN_HOP" signal to be one of the switch-criteria Disables "E_WARN_HOP" signal to be one of the switch-criteria (Default setting) TTL/CMOS interface for "PARITY ERROR" output OPTOCOUPLER interface for "PARITY ERROR" output
W205
1-2 2-3
3.2
Manual Switch Settings

The switches S201, S202 and S203 can be set manually to the channel to be tested according to the following table:
6
ON ON ON ON OFF
6
0 0 1 1 -
6
0 1 0 1 -
&+
CH1 CH2
PRBS AUTO (Default setting)
3.3
DIL-Switch Settings
S301 Not used
Switch ON S303-1 OFF De scription Extern output of control signals ENABLED Extern output of control signals DISABLED Function Default setting Disables "E_WARN_HOP" signal to be one of the switch-criteria (Default setting) Default setting
ON S303-2 OFF ON S303-3 OFF ON S303-4 OFF
EN_TVST_2M to EN_TVST input ENABLED EN_TVST_2M to EN_TVST input DISABLED Remote Software Reset ENABLED Remote Software Reset DISABLED Software Watchdog Function ENABLED Software Watchdog Function DISABLED
Default setting
Default setting
B1078
Rev. R
185
III Configuration
CHP
4.0
Alignment/Switch/Hybrid, 2NCS468A
Ch1/Ch2 ChP
S301 W600 1 2 3 W301 1 6 2 5 3 4 J1
P2
P1
Alignment/Switch/Hybrid 2NCS468A
4.1
Straps
6WUDS
W301 1-2 & 5-6 2-3 W600 1-2 Hardware switching selected VCXO connected in loop VCXO disconnected in loop Normal position
&RQQHFWLR
2-3 & 4-5
)XQFWLRQ
Software switching selected
)XQFWLRQ
Normal position
4.2
Manual Switch Setting

S301 CH1/CH2 CHP Mid Possition Traffic locked to Regular Channel Traffic locked to Protection Channel Automatic Switching
B1078 Rev. R
186
5.0
Supervisory & Subinsert, 2KCN178B

J1
S1
J2
3 4
W900
1 2
J3 J4
S902
S4
S3
P2
P1
S1, S3, S4, S902: Supervisory & Subinsert 2KCN178B

2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5.1
Straps
W900 is only present on SUs with printed board UBN1206.
6WUDS 3RVLWLRQ
1-2 1-3 W900 2-4 3-4 No connection No connection
)XQFWLRQ
2 MHz Sync In is routed to DDF panel 2 MHz Sync Out is routed to DDF panel
5.2 5.2.1
DIL-Switches Switch S1
The DIL-switch S1 sets up both software and hardware modes. S1.3 and S1.4 are hardware connected in the SU, the others are read by the SU software.
B1078
Rev. R
187
III Configuration
The switch is decoded as shown below:

6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
'HVFULSWLRQ
Software Reset (OFF = reset) Internal Polling Inhibit(OFF = Inhibit) 1+0_repeater (for Subinsert) (OFF = Disable) Watchdog Enable/Disable (OFF = Enabled) SU Station Number 1 (LSB) SU Station Number 2 SU Station Number 3 SU Station Number 4 (MSB)
'HIDXOW
ON ON OFF OFF
Note! DIL switch S1-3 is not used in the NL24x Family. Set switch to OFF in all system configurations.
SU Station Number The SU Station Number is set as follows:

68 6WDWLRQ 1XPEHU 6 6 6 6
SW Version R1P/R2P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW Version R3A or later 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON O FF O FF O FF O FF ON ON ON ON O FF O FF O FF O FF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Note! SW version refers to SU software version SW2KCN178B-24x10-R2P or SW2KCN178B-24x-10-R3A located on this unit. 188
B1078 Rev. R
5.2.2
Switch S3
The DIL-switch S3 sets up software variables and are read by the SU software. The switch is decoded as follows:
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NF34 selection (OFF=NF34) Split Mount selection (OFF=Split Mount) Not used CelLink selection (OFF=CelLink) Not used System Config 1 (LSB) System Config 2 System Config 3 System Config 4 (MSB)
Note! S3-1 must be set to ON in all radio systems SU Section Number The SU Section Number is set as follows: In SU SW version R1P and R2P; set SU section number using S3-1, S3-2, S3-3 and S3-4 and the table below. In SU SW version R3A or later, the SU section number is set on the HHT using SU parameter 17, set S3-1, S3-2, S3-3 and S3-4 to ON.
68 6HFWLRQ 1XPEHU 6 6 6 6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
B1078
Rev. R
189
III Configuration
System Config The System Config is set as follows:

6\VWHP7\SH 6 6 6 6
1+0 (34 Mb/s) 1+1 (34 Mb/s) 2+0 (34 Mb/s) 1+0 (16x2 Mb/s) 2+0 (16x2 Mb/s) 1+1 (16x2 Mb/s) Hot Standby (34 Mb/s) Hot Standby (16x2 Mb/s) 2+1 (34 Mb/s) 2+1 (16x2 Mb/s) 3+0 (34 Mb/s) * 2+1 (34 / 16x2 Mb/s) ** 2+1 (16x2 / 34 Mb/s)
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Space Diversity is set using an input parameter on the HHT (SU parameter 18). If this parameter is set to ONE the Space Diversity alarms will be included. Split Mount is set using S3-2. Split Mount is only valid for 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 systems. * 2+1 (34 / 16x2 Mb/s) means a 2+1 system with regular channel Ch1 equal 34 Mb/s, and regular channel Ch2 equal 16x2 Mb/s. ChP is protection channel for both channels. ** 2+1 (16x2 / 34 Mb/s) means a 2+1 system with regular channel Ch1 equal 16x2 Mb/s, and regular channel Ch2 equal 34 Mb/s. ChP is protection channel for both channels.
5.2.3
Switch S902
The DIL-switch S902 sets up the hardware for the subinsert unit of the 34Mb/s. In addition two of the switches (S902-6 and S902-8) are routed to an input port of the SU and used in the SU software to determine the system config.
190
B1078
Rev. R
S902 for Subinsert Unit:

6ZLWFK1XPEHU 21 2))
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Disable Ch A Disable Ch B Sel Prot Left Sel Prot Right Test of BUS Int Slave CH1-5 Left (Default) Terminal
Enable Ch A Enable Ch B Select Auto Left (Default) Select Auto Right (Default) Normal (Default) Master CH1-5 Right Repeater
5.2.4
The routing of the Supervisory channels Link A and B in the different systems is set up with DIL-switch S4 in the following manner:
III Configuration
Switch S4
For Link B: S4-2 ON ON OFF OFF S4-1 ON OFF ON OFF System Type Not used Stations w/external 64 kb/s Terminal and Add/Drop Repeater dir 2 Add/Drop Repeater dir 1
For Link A: S4-3 ON OFF System Type 64 kb/s ch dir 1 to own Subinsert 64 kb/s ch dir 1 extern - only Add/Drop (normally dir 2)
In addition the dip switch S4 enables / disables remote reset. This is set up in the following manner: S4-4 ON OFF Description Remote Reset is enabled (Default) Remote Reset is disabled
Subinsert Alarm Enabling S4-5 ON OFF Description Subinsert alarm is enabled (Default) Subinsert alarm is disabled
S4-6 to S4-8 is not used.

B1078 Rev. R
191
5.2.5
Station Type Setup

The setting of the DIP-switches for the 34 Mb/s radio-relay system is described below. 1) Station type setup for SW version R1P and R2P
System Type Terminal Master Terminal Slave Add/Drop Dir w/Subinsert Add/Drop Dir wo/Subinsert
S4-1 S4-2 S4-3 S4-5 S902 S902 S902 S902 S902 S902 S902 S902 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON X X X X X X
2) Station type setup for SW version R3A or later System Type Terminal Master Terminal Slave Add/Drop Dir w/Subinsert (Normally Dir1) Add/Drop Dir wo/Subinsert (Normally Dir2) a) ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF b) ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF S4-1 S4-2 S4-3 S4-5 S902 S902 S902 S902 S902 S902 S902 S902 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF
a) Set if Subinsert is not used for extra 5x64kb/s channels in Radio Channel 2 b) Set if Subinsert is used for extra 5x64kb/s channels in Radio Channel 2
192
B1078
Rev. R
6.0
16x2 Mb/s Mux/Demux, 2NCS521A

S903 S801 W900
3 2 1
Mux/Demux 16x2, 2NCS521A
123
W901
12
S902 S901 W802 S900

1 2 3
W801 S101
P2
J1
P1
S900, S901, S902

1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S101
1 2
1 2 3 4
16x2 MUX/DEMUX 2NCS521A
6.1
Strap W801 W802 W900
Straps
Position 1-2 1-2 2-3 1-2 2-3 Function Testpoint for measuring the 34.368 MHz AIS frequency. Signal on pin2, GND on pin1. Control voltage to the 34.368 MHz VCXO locked to +2.5V; gives nominal output frequency PLL control of the 34.368 MHz VCXO. Remote Reset RMT_RES) to the ACU from rear connector enabled. Remote Reset RMT_RES) to the ACU from rear connector disabled. Reset output from Reset logic in the ACU disabled. Reset output from Reset logic in the ACU enabled. 193
W901
1-2 2-3
B1078
Rev. R
III Configuration
6.2
Switch S801 and S903

Position Description ChP ("UP") Manually locked to Protection Channel in Receive direction ("MID") Switching in receive direction performed by the CH_SEL SW_ENABLE rear connector input pins Ch1/Ch2 ("DOWN") Manually locked to Regular channel in receive direction Pushbutton "IN" Resets the ACU software Pushbutton "OUT" No action
6.3
S101-1 ON OFF S101-2 ON OFF S101-3 ON OFF S101-4 ON OFF
DIL-Switch Settings
Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 1 to "1". Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 1 to "0". Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 2 to "1". Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 2 to "0". Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 3 to "1". Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 3 to "0". Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 4 to "1". Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 4 to "0". S900-1 to S900-4 must always be set to ON to ensure proper operation of the Mux/Demux board. S900-5 to S900-8, S901 and S902 are not used.
194
B1078
Rev. R
7.0
Switch Matrix Board, 2NCS522A

S901 S800 S700
ON 1
S902
21
W701
1 2 3
W703
1 2 3
W801
21 W803
ON
ON 1
S900 J1
P2
P1
S400
ON 1
S100
ON 1
ON
1 2 34
REAR SIDE
Switch Matrix 2NCS522A 195
B1078
Rev. R
III Configuration
7.1
Straps
Strap Position Function W701 1-2 Control voltage to the 34.368 MHz VCXO, OWN direction, locked to +2.5 V; gives nominal output frequency. 2-3 PLL control of the 34.368 MHz VCXO, OWN direction. W703 1-2 Testpoint for measuring the 34.368 MHz AIS frequency, OWN direction. Signal on pin2, GND on pin 1. W801 1-2 Control voltage to the 34.368 MHz VCXO, OTHER direction, locked to +2.5 V; gives nominal output frequency. 2-3 PLL control of the 34.368 MHz VCXO, OTHER direction. W803 1-2 Testpoint for measuring the 34.368 MHz AIS frequency, OTHER direction. Signal on pin2, GND on pin1.
7.2
Switch S700 DIR1

Position ChP (UP) Description Manually locked to the protection input channel, OWN direction. (MID) Switching in OWN direction is performed by the CH_SEL_OWN and SW_ENABLE_OWN rear connector input pins. Ch1/Ch2 Manually locked to the regular input channel, (DOWN) OWN direction. ChP (UP) Manually locked to the protection input channel, OTHER direction. (MID) Switching in OTHER direction is performed by the CH_SEL_OTH and SW_ENABLE_OTH rear connector input pins. Ch1/Ch2 Manually locked to the regular input channel, (DOWN) OTHER direction. Pushbutton in Resets the ACU software. Pushbutton out No action.
S800 DIR2
S901
196
B1078
Rev. R
7.3
S100-1 ON OFF S100-2 ON OFF S100-3 ON OFF S100-4 ON OFF S400-1 ON OFF S400-2 ON OFF
DIL-Switch Settings
Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 1 to "1". OWN dir. Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 1 to "0". OWN dir. Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 2 to "1". OWN dir. Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 2 to "0". OWN dir. Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 3 to "1". OWN dir. Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 3 to "0". OWN dir. Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 4 to "1". OWN dir. Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 4 to "0". OWN dir. Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 1 to "1". OTHER dir. Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 1 to "0". OTHER dir. Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 2 to "1". OTHER dir. Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 2 to "0". OTHER dir.
B1078
Rev. R
197
III Configuration
S400-3 ON OFF S400-4 ON OFF S902-7 ON OFF S902-8 ON OFF
Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 3 to "1". OTHER dir. Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 3 to "0". OTHER dir. Description Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 4 to "1". OTHER dir. Sets bit no. 12 (National Use bit) in 8.448 Mb/s tributary no. 4 to "0". OTHER dir. Description Remote Reset (RMT_RES) to the ACU from rear connector, enabled Remote Reset (RMT_RES) to the ACU from rear connector, disabled Description Reset output from the Reset logic to the -controller in the ACU, enabled Reset output from the Reset logic to the -controller in the ACU, disabled S900 and S902-1 to S902-6 are not used.
198
B1078
Rev. R
8.0
Service Channel Selective Call, 2NF533A/B
S203
7 4 1
W501
8 9 6 3
1 2
W201
S501
W208
4 1 4 1 5 6 3 6 3
W206
W204
2 1 2
4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
W210
1 2
W203
W202
6 3 6 3 6 3
6 3
W209
W207
W205
S601
5 3 1
W401 S204 S202 S201 W604

1 2 1 1 2 3 3 6 4 2
W603 2 S602
W605
5 3 1
W602
6 4 2 7 4 1 7 4 1 8 2 9 6 3 9 6 3 W101 6 4 2 5 3 1
W102
S204
ON
S601
1
S602 S501
ON
ON
6 5
ON
Service Channel Selective Call 2NF533A/B
B1078
Rev. R
199
III Configuration
W601
S201 / S202
8 7
6 5
3 2 1 ON
8.1
Straps
Strapping of artificial load External telephone: Artificial load 600 ohm 600 ohm + 1mF W501 p1 - p2 p2 - p3
Strapping of levels Other equipment 1 & 2 input Input Strap 0 dB + 0.5 dB - 0.5 dB Other eqpt 1 W603 OFF p2 - p3 p1 - p2 Other eqpt 2 W605 OFF p2 - p3 p1 -p2
Strapping of balanced/unbalanced interfaces: Interface Straps concerned EOW W401 Other eqpt 1 W601 Other eqpt 2 W602
Balanced Unbalanced
Strap ON OFF
Strapping of W604: This strap connects the Other eqpt 1 & 2 input and the 4w bal/unbal input to the SCI. When none of these inputs are used, the strap should be off. Strapping of interface to Service Channel Adapters: When any adapter is connected to the rear connector (P1), the straps W101 and W102 should be in position 1-2/4-5/7-9, else in position 2-3/5-6/8-9.
200
B1078
Rev. R
Strapping for positive or negative supply on E/M, Control and Call Wires Interface E-Wire M-Wire Call-inp Call-out Control 1 Control 2 Straps conserned W204 W209 W207 W205 W208 W206 Strap p1 - p2 p2 - p3
Positive 48V supply Negative 48V supply
8.2
DIL-Switch Settings
III Configuration
Setting of DIL-switches for attenuators: By means of the DIL-switches the attenuators can vary from 0 to 15.5 (7.5) in 0.5 dB step Switch= "OFF" means 0 attenuation Switch= "ON" means the following attenuations: Att. 0.5 dB 1.0 dB 2.0 dB 4.0 dB 8.0 dB Ext. tel inp S501 sw5 S501 sw6 S501 sw7 S501 sw8 Ext. tel out S501 sw1 S501 sw2 S501 sw3 S501 sw4 4W bal inp S601 sw1 S601 sw2 S601 sw3 S601 sw4 S601 sw5 4W bal out S602 sw1 S602 sw2 S602 sw3 S602 sw4 S602 sw5
B1078
Rev. R
201
Setting of DIL-switches for selective calling: Ext. tel 1. digit Ext. tel 2. digit Int. tel 1. digit Int. tel 2. digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 * # S201 sw4 S201 sw8 S202 sw4 S202 sw8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF S201 sw3 S201 sw7 S202 sw3 S202 sw7 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF S201 sw2 S201 sw6 S202 sw2 S202 sw6 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON S201 sw1 S201 sw5 S202 sw1 S202 sw5 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
* and # are normally not used for selective calling
202
B1078
Rev. R
Setting of DIL-switches for time-slot choise: Time slot 0 , 16 1 , 17 2 , 18 3 , 19 4 , 20 5 , 21 6 , 22 7 , 23 8 , 24 9 , 25 10 ,26 11 , 27 12 , 28 13 , 29 14 , 30 15 , 31 S204 sw2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF S204 sw3 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF S204 sw4 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF S204 sw5 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Not allowed Supervisory use
Strapping of W210 "Constant off hook" This strap simulates an off hook situation and leads to a full D/A - A/D convertion constantly. This should normally be off, but whenever any analog connections are made to J1, the strap should be on.
B1078
Rev. R
203
III Configuration
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
9.0
Service Channel Collective Call, 2NF467A
S203
1 2
W201
W208
4 1
4 1 4 1 4 1 1 2
W206
W210
1 2
W203
W202
6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3
W207
W205
5 3 1
W401 S204 W603 W604

1 2 1 2 3 6 4 2
5 3 1
W601
6 4 2
S204 5 ON
Service Channel Collective Call 2NF467A
204
B1078
Rev. R
9.1
Strapping
Strapping of levels "Other equipment input" Input Strap 0 dB +0.5 dB -0.5 dB Other eqpt 1 W603 OFF 2-3 1-2
Strapping of balanced/unbalanced intrfaces Interface Straps concerned EOW W401 Strap ON OFF Other eqpt W601
Strapping for positive or negative supply on Control and Call Wire Interface Call-inp Call-out Control 1 Control 2 Straps concerned W207 W205 W208 W206 Strap 1-2, 4-5 2-3, 5-6
Positive 48V supply Negative 48V supply Strapping of W604:
This strap connects the Other eqpt input to the SCI. When this input is not used, the strap should be off.
B1078
Rev. R
205
III Configuration
Balanced Unbalanced
Setting of DIL-switches for time-slot choice Time slot 0,16 1,17 2,18 3,19 4,20 5,21 6,22 7,23 8,24 9,25 10,26 11,27 12,28 13,29 14,30 15,31 S204 sw2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF S204 sw3 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF S204 sw4 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF S204 sw5 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Not allowed Supervisory use
Strapping of W210 "Constant off hook" This strap simulates an off hook situation and leads to a full D/A - A/D convertion constantly. This should normally be off, but whenever any analog connections are made to J1, the strap should be on.
206
B1078
Rev. R
10.0
Alarm Adapter Unit, 2KN181A
ENABLE/DISABLE WATCHDOG W9 3 2 1 MNL RESET S2
EA/EA W10
W3 W1 W7 W2 1 2 3 1 2 3 W6 W8 W4 W5
12345678
ON
S1 CURR LOOP TTL CURR LOOP TTL
3 2 1
W11
REMOTE RESET
P1
19
37 J1
20 32
Alarm Adapter Unit 2KN181A Note! If additional Alarm Adapter Units are installed, observe that the number of AAUs must be set. See Section II, para 5.3.1.6 and para 5.9.
B1078
Rev. R
207
III Configuration
10.1
Straps
ALARM INPUTS: Strap W1 W4 W2 W5 W3 W6 W7 W8 W1 W4 W2 W5 W3 W6 W7 W8 Position 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 Description Alarm 1 - 4 Current LOOP Alarm 5 - 8 Current LOOP Alarm 9 - 12 Current LOOP Alarm 13 - 16 Current LOOP Alarm 1 - 4 TTL Alarm 5 - 8 TTL Alarm 9 - 12 TTL Alarm 13 - 16 TTL
W1, W4 configures alarm input 1 to 4 W2, W5 configures alarm input 5 to 8 W3, W6 configures alarm input 9 to 12 W7, W8 configures alarm input 13 to 16 (both straps must be in same position) EPROM: Strap W10 W10 Position 1-2 2-3 Description Internal EPROM External EPROM (NORM)
208
B1078
Rev. R
WATCHDOG: Strap W9 W9 Position 1-2 2-3 Description Disable Watchdog Enable Watchdog (NORM)
REMOTE RESET: Strap W11 W11 Position 1-2 2-3 Description Disable RMT reset (NORM) Enable RMT reset
10.2
Manual Reset Switch

Switch S2 Position Description Push-button for reset of unit
III Configuration
10.3
DIL-Switches
S1
21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AAU Address 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 2 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
AAU Address 3 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

Not used 4 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON AAU no 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B1078
Rev. R
209
11.0
Adapter 64 kb/s, 2KN182B
S1
P3 S2
LOWER CONNECTOR CONFIGURATION SWITCHES
Adapter 64 kb/s 2KN182B
210
B1078
Rev. R
11.1
DIL-Switches
Two octal DIL configuration-switches give the following options with switches closed (pos. ON) as default: Function S1-1 Time slot, LSB 2 Time slot, LSB 3 Time slot, LSB 4 Time slot, LSB 5 Time slot, MSB 6 Repeat./Term sel 7 Mode select ch1 8 Mode select ch2 S2-1 Mode select ch1 2 Mode select ch2 3 Channel enable 4 Channel enable 5 Test Loop enable 6 Test Loop enable 7 not used 8 not used * = Default Closed (ON) 0 0 0* 0* 0* Rep. modus Codir. Codir G703 G703 Disable ch1 Disable ch2 Disabled Disabled Open (OFF) 1* 1* 1 1 1 Term. modus Contradir. Contradir. V11 V11 Enable ch1 Enable ch2 Test loop ch1 Test loop ch2
Ch select (S1-1 to S1-5) specifies Bus-channel. S1-6 selects terminal mode or repeater mode. In terminal mode, time slot n and n+1 will be available while in repeater mode, time slot n and n+16 will be available. Time slot n is the channel selected by bus ch select. If G703 interface is selected, one may chose between co- or contradirectional mode. If the test loop is active, the 64 kb/s data input to the adapter will be returned as data out, without beeing transfered. The test will not function if G703 Codir is selected.
B1078
Rev. R
211
III Configuration
Chn Adr. select S1-1 0* ON 1 OFF 2 ON 3 OFF 4 ON 5 OFF 16* ON 17 OFF 18 ON 19 OFF 20 ON 21 OFF *Not allowed
S1-2 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
Switch pos. S1-3 S1-4 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
S1-5 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Note: Switch in pos. ON equals logic "0" Switch in pos. OFF equals logic "1"
212
B1078
Rev. R
12.0
2 Mb/s Adapter, 2KN213A

ON
Adapter 2Mb/s, 2KN213A
1 2 3 4
ALM PROT REG AIS MAN LOCK

ON
S900
1 2 3 4
CH P CH1 S701
MANUAL LOCK P1
J1
W101
W700
HDB3 OUT HDB3 INP
2 Mb/s Adapter 2KN213A
B1078
Rev. R
213
III Configuration
3 2 1
1 2 3
12.1
Straps
Strap W101 W700 Position 1-2 2-3 1-2 2-3 Function Test position Normal position CH_SEL_PAL CH_SEL_SU
12.2
DIL-Switch Settings
Alarms included in Unit Alarm LED: S900-1 ON OFF S900-2 ON OFF S900-3 ON OFF S900-4 ON OFF Description INP ALM REG included INP ALM REG not included Description INP ALM PROT included INP ALM PROT not included Description DATA OUT ALM included DATA OUT ALM not included Description HDB3 INP ALM included HDB3 INP ALM not included
214
B1078
Rev. R
13.0
PABX Adapter, 2N579A
3 2 1
W 104B W 104A
J1
W101 1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3 W100
S100
P1
1 2
W 103
S100
PABX Adapter 2N579A
B1078
Rev. R
215
III Configuration
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13.1 13.1.1
Straps Strapping of PABX Adapter

Check that strapping on the PABX Adapter is correct before installing the board. Strap W100 W101 W103 W104A W104B W104A W104B Position 1-2 * 1-2 * ON * 1-2 4-5 2-3 * 5-6 * Comments Pos 2 - 3 used for factory testing Pos 2 - 3 used for factory testing Removed only during factory test Radio system with negative battery pole connected to ground Radio system with positive battery pole connected to ground
* = Normal Position Select the calling number (address) for Adapter by setting one switch in ON position on the 10 pos. DIL-Switch (S100). The figures from 0 - 9 is marked on the PCB. E.g., if 8 is chosen, #8 have to be dialled to get connected to the PABX. Off hook and detected # will start a necessary control signal to connect a PABX, and when 8 is detected on the Adapter, the correct PABX is connected to the party line.
13.1.2
Strapping of Service Channel, 2NF533A/B

2W (two-wire) from PABX is connected via the DDF panel to the Adapter by means of a spesial cable. Connect the 2W to pin 36 and pin 37 (37pins D-sub). Set strap W101 and W102 in pos 1-2, 4-5 and 7-8 to route the actual signals between 2NF533A/B and 2N579A via the cable. Set strap W210 ON. This strap simulates an off hook situation for the voice band and leads to a constant full D/A - A/D convertion. This is necessary whenever any analogue connection is made to J1. The voice frequency signal connection between the Service Channel board and the Adapter board is 4W to obtain galvanic isolation between the PABX and the Radio equipment. If the line loss is high, it is possible to compensate for the loss in signal level by adjusting attenuators on the Service Channel board.
216
B1078
Rev. R
DIL-Switch S601 is for signals from PABX, while S602 is for signals to PABX. (See chapter 8.2 this booklet or handbook for 2NF533A/B). The strap W604 must be ON to route the 4W input internally on 2N533A.
13.1.3
System Strapping and Wiring of Control Signal

The figure on next page shows a principle schematic diagram for distribution of Control signal. On repeaters, the control signal is internally distributed. Between terminals, the control signal must be distributed by strapping Ctrl2 (out) to Ctrl1 (inp). Ctrl2 (out): J1-34 Ctrl1 (inp): J1-33 Depending on positive battery (Negative Station Ground) or negative battery (Positive Station Ground), Ctrl Signal must be strapped on 2NF533A/B:
B1078
Rev. R
217
III Configuration
DIR 1 DIR 2
Definition of transmission directions
1)$
TO R AD IO D IR 1
J1 33 CTRL 1
TO RAD IO DIR 2
OFF HOOK DET #
FROM RADIO DIR 1
FROM RADIO DIR 2
34
CTRL 2
SERVICE CHANNEL BOARD
1$
+5V PABX ADAPTER BOARD
Principle Schematic Diagram for Distribution of Control Signal.
218
B1078
Rev. R
Positive Battery: Ctrl2- strap W206 in pos 1-2, 4-5 Ctrl1- strap W208 in pos 1-2, 4-5
+5V LOGIC CIRCUIT +5V
+ VBAT
CTRL 1
J1-33
CTRL 2
J1-34
Negative Battery: Ctrl2- strap W206 in pos 2-3, 5-6 Ctrl1- strap W208 in pos 2-3, 5-6
+5V LOGIC CIRCUIT
+5V
CTRL 1
VBAT
J1-33
CTRL 2
J1-34
B1078
Rev. R
219
III Configuration
220
B1078 Rev. R
Connection Panel UWB341

J24
3
TB3
14.0 Connection Panel, Baseband, UWB340 and UWB341
P1
J2
J18 J19
J3 J6
J1
S1
J25 J26 J27 J28 J29 J30
J5
J4
J35
J36
6 5
4 6
TB2
J20
TB3 TB2 TB1
J8
J7
J9
2
1 3 2
J21
J11
J10
J12
FL2
1
3
TB1
J22
6 5
J14
J13
J15
S2
FL1
J17
J16
J23
P2
Interconnection for repeaters
S2
RF ID 1, CH2 RF ID 2, CH2 RF ID 1, CHP RF ID 2, CHP RF ID 1, CH1 RF ID 2, CH1 S2-7: TERMINAL/REPEATER S2-8: DIRECTION S2-9: 0_CONFIG S2-10: In Repeaters; ON= DIR1, OFF= DIR2
ON
S1
DATA INSERT 2 Mb/s CLK INSERT 2 MHz SYNC INSERT 500 Hz DATA EXTRACT 2 Mb/s
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
S1-5:URG_ALM_XMT_CHP S1-6:URG_ALM_RCV_CHP S1-7:URG_ALM_XMT_CH2 S1-8:URG_ALM_RCV_CH2 S1-9: URG_ALM_SM_OTH_CH1 S1-10: URG_ALM_SM_OTH_CH2
Connection Panel UWB340

J24
1 1
B1078 Rev. R
P1
J2
J3
J18 J19
J1
J31
S1
J25
J5
J6
J4
J35
J36
J26
6
TB3
J20
J32
TB3 TB2 TB1
J8
J9
J7
2 1 3
5 4 6
J27 J28
J21
J33
TB2 TB1
J11
J12
J10
2 1 3 2 1
5 4
FL2
J29
J22
6 5 4
J14
J34
J13
J15
J30
S2
FL1
J17
J16
J23
P2
S2
RF ID 1, CH2 RF ID 2, CH2 RF ID 1, CHP RF ID 2, CHP RF ID 1, CH1 RF ID 2, CH1 S2-7: TERMINAL/REPEATER S2-8: DIRECTION S2-9: 0_CONFIG S2-10: In Repeaters; ON= DIR1, OFF= DIR2
ON
S1
DATA INSERT 2 Mb/s CLK INSERT 2 MHz SYNC INSERT 500 Hz DATA EXTRACT 2 Mb/s S1-5:URG_ALM_XMT_CHP S1-6:URG_ALM_RCV_CHP S1-7:URG_ALM_XMT_CH2 S1-8:URG_ALM_RCV_CH2 S1-9: URG_ALM_SM_OTH_CH1 S1-10: URG_ALM_SM_OTH_CH2
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
221
III Configuration
14.1
DIL-Switches
S1 2Mb/s Bus: S1-1 ON OFF S1-2 ON OFF S1-3 ON OFF S1-4 ON OFF Description Data insert 2 Mb/s; Adapt no 4, 5, and 6, connected to Adapt no 1, 2 and 3 Data insert 2 Mb/s; Adapt no 4, 5, and 6, disconnected from Adapt no 1, 2 and 3 Description Clk insert 2 MHz; Adapt no 4, 5, and 6, connected to Adapt no 1, 2 and 3 Clk insert 2 MHz; Adapt no 4, 5, and 6, disconnected from Adapt no 1, 2 and 3 Description Sync insert 500 Hz; Adapt no 4, 5, and 6, connected to Adapt no 1, 2 and 3 Sync insert 500 Hz; Adapt no 4, 5, and 6, disconnected from Adapt no 1, 2 and 3 Description Data extr. 2 Mb/s; Adapt no 4, 5, and 6, connected to Adapt no 1, 2 and 3 Data extr. 2 Mb/s; Adapt no 4, 5, and 6, disconnected from Adapt no 1, 2 and 3
222
B1078
Rev. R
Set-up of Main and Urgent alarm generation via PAL on Baseband connection panel Configuration 1+0 2+0 3+0 1+1 2+1 S1-5 OFF ON ON ON ON S1-6 OFF ON ON ON ON S1-7 OFF OFF ON OFF ON S1-8 OFF OFF ON OFF ON S1-9 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF S1-10 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF S2-9 ON ON ON OFF OFF
Only used in 16x2 Mb/s repeater configuration
Note! S1-9 and S1-10 is only set in ON position when using 16x2 Switch Matrix on Add/Drop-Repeater. S1-9 and S1-10 is opperated in the following way: Configuration 1+1 2+1 Slot no., Switch Matrix: 2 2 and 4 S1-9 ON ON S1-10 OFF ON
III Configuration
B1078
Rev. R
223
S2 RF-ID: S2-1 ON OFF S2-2 ON OFF S2-3 ON OFF S2-4 ON OFF S2-5 ON OFF S2-6 ON OFF Description RF-ID bit no. 1 (LSB) Ch2=0 RF-ID bit no. 1 (LSB) Ch2=1 Description RF-ID bit no. 2 (MSB) Ch2=0 RF-ID bit no. 2 (MSB) Ch2=1 Description RF-ID bit no. 1 (LSB) ChP=0 RF-ID bit no. 1 (LSB) ChP=1 Description RF-ID bit no. 2 (MSB) ChP=0 RF-ID bit no. 2 (MSB) ChP=1 Description RF-ID bit no. 1 (LSB) Ch1=0 RF-ID bit no. 1 (LSB) Ch1=1 Description RF-ID bit no. 2 (MSB) Ch1=0 RF-ID bit no. 2 (MSB) Ch1=1
Terminal/Repeater S2-7 ON OFF S2-8 ON OFF S2-9 ON OFF S2-10 ON OFF 224 Description Terminal; P1-5b (SELECT SECTION DET)=0 Repeater; P1-5b (SELECT SECTION DET)=1 Description ACU_ADR2=0; for Through Repeater ACU_ADR2=1; for Terminal and Add/Drop Repeater Description 1+0, 2+0 or 3+0 configuration 1+1 or 2+1 configuration Description Terminal and Add/Drop Repeater, Dir 1 Add/Drop Repeater, Dir 2
B1078 Rev. R
15.0
Alarm Out Unit, 2KN225A

P1
S301
S302
J1
S303 H1
Alarm Out Unit, 2KN225A

B1078 Rev. R
225
III Configuration
15.1
DIL-Switch settings
Settings for switch S301.
S301-1 S301-2 S301-3 System

ON OFF OFF
Radio, 16x2 & 34Mb OFF ON OFF Radio, 16x2 & 34Mb/s ON OFF ON Fiber, 16x2 & 34Mb/s OFF ON ON Fiber, 16x2 & 34Mb/s Other settings are not defined or not valid Settings for switch S302. Switch Open (=OFF) S302-1 Watchdog disabled S302-2 Remote reset disabled
Shows alarms for 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 systems Shows alarms for chan 2 in 2+1 systems Shows alarms for 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 systems Not valid
Alarms shown
Closed (=ON) Watchdog enabled Remote reset enabled
15.2
Connector J1
Alarms on Radio systems:
1+0, 1+1 & 2+0 systems Ch. 2 in 2+1 systems Output nr. Alarm name: Alarm name: 1 Tx-alarm 2 Rx-alarm 3 Low Rx input alarm 4 Modulator alarm 5 Demod. alm. chan. 1 6 Demod. alm. chan. 2 / P* Demod. alm. chan. 2 7 LBER chan. 1 8 LBER chan. 2 / P* LBER chan. 2 9 Power supply alarm 10 Switch alarm 11 AIS 12 Test mode 13 Input tributaries alarm 14 Output tributaries alarm 15 Mux alarm 16 Remote demux alarm Note: * = In a 2+0 system, the chan. P is considered chan. 2. 226
B1078 Rev. R
Alarms on Fiber Optic systems: Output nr: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Alarm name: Tx-alarm Rx-alarm Low optical input power Laser off HBER chan. 1 HBER chan. 2 / P LBER chan. 1 LBER chan. 2 / P Power supply alarm Switch alarm AIS Test mode Input tributaries alarm Output tributaries alarm Mux alarm Remote demux alarm
B1078
Rev. R
227
III Configuration
16.0
Control Board Space Diversity, 3KN212A

P1
S801 S80 S800 S87
S86
Space Diversity Controller Board, 3KN212A 228

B1078 Rev. R
H802 H801 H800
H803
16.1
Delay and Delay Calculation

Delay of the signal received at the Combiner Board Space Diversity, 8DFK131A, is unequal due to the difference in guide length from Main and Space antenna. This delay is compensated by use of Equalizer Line SD Board, 8F302A. The delay difference must be calculated (see below) and preset. Delay is calculated using the following formula: t = 4.4 * L where t is delay in nanoseconds., and L is guide length difference in meters.
16.2
Delay Setting
The delay shall be set from the Control Board SD, 3KN212A, not from the Equalizer Line SD Board. 1. All switches on Equalizer Line SD Board should be set to off (factory preset). 2. Turn switch 1 on S86 to ON. This enables delay setting from the Control Board SD. 3. Set switch 2-8 according to calculated delay. See markings.
16.3
Calibration
Calibration of Space Diversity is necessary to establish nominal signal levels at Combiner Board SD detectors. The procedure is done only once, but always after a modification or change of units in the radio group. 1. Turn switch 4 on S87 to on. This enables the calibration routine. 2. Reset the Control Board SD by pressing S800. 3. Connect Modem IF OUT to Space Diversity Combiner Board's MAIN IF INP. 4. Turn switch S801 at the Control Board SD's front towards flashing green LED. 5. Connect Modem IF OUT to Equalizer Line SD Board's IF INP. 6. Connect Equalizer Line SD Board IF OUT to Combiner Board SD SPACE IF INP. 7. Turn switch S801 at the Control Board SD's front towards flashing green LED. 8. Verify that ALM LED is OFF. 9. Turn switch 4 on S87 to OFF . This disables the calibration routine. 10. Reset the Controller Board by pressing S800.
B1078
Rev. R
229
III Configuration
17.0
Line Interface, Cable, 2FY310A
S1
Line Interface, Cable, 2FY310A
6
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
17.1
DIL-Switch S1
The DIL-switch S1 must be set for Indoor/Outdoor position of unit and cable equalizer OFF/ON. S1 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 Indoor OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Outdoor ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON Notes
Always OFF
Note! S1-4 (Equalizer OB/OFF) The length of the cable between IDU and ODU can vary from a few meters to more than 100 meters. To simplify installation, the switch S1-4 is always set to position OFF (Equalizer OFF). Under certain circumstances the performance can be improved by setting the switch to position ON. This is only recommended when IDU/ODO operates in constant temperatures above 20 C. 230
B1078 Rev. R
SECTION IV
Frequency Setting
B1078
Rev. Q
231
IV Freq. Setting

232
B1078 Rev. Q
1.0FREQUENCY SETTING PROCEDURE, 2-13GHz

1.1 2GHz
The radio frequency of the NL240 Family is controlled by frequency synthesizers. The radio channel is selected by internal DIP-switches in the radio unit. Changing radio channel is done by the following step by step procedure. Note! Extension card or cable has to be used during the following procedure. 1. Remove the small cover in the lower part of the XCVR unit. 2. S101 is used for choosing the XCVR to be used in a Space div. system or not. If it is not used in a space div. system, dipswitch 3 and 4 shall be "0" (MAIN). If the XCVR is used in a Space div. system, dipswitch 3 and 4 shall be "1" (SP). Dipswitch 1 and 2 are only used for DRO's. 3. The transmit and receive frequencies are set separately. S401 controls the receiver frequency and S501 the transmitter frequency. 4. Identify the actual channel in tables on the next pages. Find the corresponding binary setting for the switch (right column). The physical switch setting for S401 and S501 is explained in figure 1-1. 5. Set the correct switch positions (S401) and press S402. The LED H401 illuminates for a moment. 6. Press S402 once more to verify proper frequency.
IV Freq. Setting
7. Set the correct switch positions (S501) and press S502. The LED H501 illuminates for a moment. 8. Press S502 once more to verify proper frequency.
1.1.1
When the radio is used as a main RCVR in a Space Diversity system: 1. Set dipswitch 3 and 4 on S101 to "1" (SP (space)). 2. Remove the small cover on the Space Diversity Receiver 3. Set DIP-switches on S301 to 11 (US and MT). See fig. 1-2. 4. Connect 4J6 on the main XCVR to 4J6 on the SD RCVR 5. Press S402 in the main RCVR. Verify that the LED H201 in the SD RCVR illuminates for a moment
Space Diversity systems
B1078
Rev. Q
233
1.2
5GHz and higher

The radio frequency of the NL240 Family is controlled by frequency synthesizers. The radio channel is selected by internal DIP-switches in the radio unit. Changing radio channel is done by the following step by step procedure. Note! Extension card or cable has to be used during the following procedure. 1. Remove the small cover in the lower part of the XCVR or space diversity RCVR unit. 2. S101 is used for choosing the XCVR to be used in a Space div. system or not. If the XCVR is not used in a Space div. system, dipswitch 3 and 4 shall be "0" (MAIN). If the XCVR is used in a Space div. system, dipswitch 3 and 4 shall be "1" (SP). Dipswitch 1 and 2 are used for providing the right LED to illuminate, when tuning the DRO. If the DRO has a resonator fastened to the tuning screw, the frequency of the DRO will decrease when turning the tuning screw towards the resonator. In this case dipswitch 1 and 2 on S101 shall be "0" (RT (resonatortuner)). This is the situation for the 5 GHz DRO's only, and will be preset from the factory. If the DRO is equipped with a metal-tuning screw only, the frequency of the DRO will increase when turning the tuning screw towards the resonator. In this case dipswitch 1 and 2 on S101 shall be "1" (MT (metal tuner)). This is the situation for all other DRO's, and is preset from the factory. 3. The transmit and receive frequencies are set separately. S401 controls the receiver frequency and S501 the transmitter frequency. 4. Identify the actual channel in tables on the next pages. Find the corresponding binary setting for the switch (right column). The physical switch setting for S401 and S501 is explained in figure 1-1. 5. Set the correct switch positions (S401) and press S402. The LED H401 and one of the LEDs H101 or H102 should illuminate. 6. Adjust the Receiver oscillator tuning screw (situated on the rear side of the Transceiver unit, near the top) according to the LED indicators H101 and H102. Adjust the tuning screw slowly to avoid that the right frequency is passed.
234
B1078
Rev. Q
a) If H101 is on; turn the tuning screw clockwise until H101 turns off. b) If H102 is on; turn the tuning screw counter-clockwise until H102 turns off. Both LEDs and LED H401 should be off after this adjustment, assuming an ambient temperature between +20C and +30C. 7. Press S402 once more to verify proper adjustment. 8. Set the correct switch positions (S501) and press S502. The LED H501 and one of the LEDs H103 or H104 should illuminate. 9. Adjust The Transmitter oscillator tuning screw (situated on the bottom side of the transceiver unit) according to the LED indicators H103 and H104. Adjust the tuning screw slowly to avoid that the right frequency is passed. a) If H103 is on; turn the tuning screw clockwise until H103 turns off. b) If H104 is on; turn the tuning screw counter-clockwise until H104 turns off. Both LEDs and LED H501 should be off after this adjustment, assuming an ambient temperature between +20C and +30C. 10. Press S502 once more to verify proper adjustment.
1.2.1
Space Diversity systems

When the radio is used as a main RCVR in a Space Diversity system: 1. Set dipswitch 3 and 4 on S101 to "1" (SP (space)). 2. Remove the small cover on the Space Diversity Receiver. Set the DIPswitch S301 correctly; Sideband-switch must be set according to sideband setting in the main RCVR, see frequency table (1=US, 0=LS). For US dip-switch 2 on S301 shall be "1" (US). For LS dipswitch 2 on S301 shall be "0" (LS). Dipswitch 1 is used for providing the right LED to illuminate, when tuning the DRO. If the DRO has a resonator fastened to the tuningscrew, the frequency of the DRO will decrease when when turning the tuning screw towards the resonator. In this case dipswitch 1 on S301 shall be 235
B1078
Rev. Q
IV Freq. Setting
"0" (RT (resonator-tuner)). This is the situation for the 5 GHz DRO's only, and will be preset from the factory. If the DRO is equipped with a metal-tuning screw only, the frequency of the DRO will increase when turning the tuning screw towards the resonator. In this case dipswitch 1 on S301 shall be "1" (MT (metal tuner)). This is the situation for all other DRO's, and is preset from the factory 3. Connect 4J6 on main XCVR to 4J6 on SD Receiver. Press S402 in main XCVR Adjust the Receiver oscillator tuning screw (situated on the rear side of the SD RCVR unit, near the top) according to the LED indicators H202 and H203. Adjust the tuning screw slowly to avoid that the right frequency is passed. a) If H202 is on; turn the tuning screw clockwise until H202 turns off. b) If H203 is on; turn the tuning screw counter-clockwise until H203 turns off. Both LEDs and LED H201 should be off after this adjustment, assuming an ambient temperature between +20C and +30C. 4. Press S402 once more to verify proper adjustment.
236
B1078
Rev. Q
OSCILLATOR TUNING SCREW, RECEIVER (Not on 2 GHz) 4J4
4J3
S401 H101 H102 H401 S101 W101 S501
Not on 2 GHz
4J6
H103 H104 H501
Not on 2 GHz
OSCILLATOR TUNING SCREW, TRANSMITTER (Not on 2 GHz)
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
Example of Switch Setting, Channel A3
Example of Switch Setting of S101, Space diversity Fig. 1-1

B1078 Rev. Q
Transceiver Unit 237
IV Freq. Setting
ON
Not mounted on 2 GHz
H201 H202 H203 W1
4J6
S301
S301
Fig. 1-2
Space Divercity Receiver
238
B1078
Rev. Q
2.0
FREQUENCY SETTING PROCEDURE, 15GHz

The radio frequency of NL247 is controlled by a frequency synthesizer. The radio channel is selected by an internal DIP-switch in the radio unit. Changing radio channel is done by the following step by step procedure. Note! Extension card or cable has to be used during the following procedure 1. Remove the small cover in the lower part of the radio unit. 2. Identify the actual channel. See frequency tables in chapter 3. Find the corresponding binary setting for the switch (right column). The physical switch setting for S401 is explained in figure 2-1. 3. Set the correct switch positions (S401) and press S402. The LED H401 should flash briefly and one of the LEDs H101 or H102 should illuminate. 4. Adjust the oscillator tuning screw according to the LED indicators H101 and H102.
IV Freq. Setting
a) If H101 is on: turn the tuning screw clockwise until H101 turns off. b) If H102 is on: turn the tuning screw counter-clockwise until H102 turns off. Both LEDs should be off after this adjustment, assuming an ambient temperature between +20C and +30C. 5. Press S402 once more to verify proper adjustment.
B1078
Rev. Q
239
The Low band version of the transceiver, transmits in the lower half frequency band and receives in the upper half frequency band. The Upper band version of the transceiver transmits in the upper half frequency band and receives in the lower half frequency band. In both cases the duplex spacing is fixed to 420 MHz. If the transmitter is set to channel 1a, the receiver will automatically be set to channel 1a', and vice verca. TRANSCEIVER L(OWER) U(PPER) TRANSMIT CHANN 1a-15d, 1A-15B 1a'-15d', 1A'-15B' RECEIVE CHANN 1a'-15d', 1A'-15B' 1a-15d, 1A-15B
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
Fig. 2-1 Switch setting (S401) channel #7c.
240
ON
1
B1078 Rev. Q
OSCILLATOR TUNING SCREW
IC403
S401
R303
H401 H101
H102
Fig. 2-2
Transceiver Unit, 10L15U420C-34A and 10L15L420C-34A
B1078
Rev. Q
241
IV Freq. Setting
3.0
3.1
RF CHANNEL ARRANGEMENT
2 GHz
Channel spacing: 29 MHz Minimum spacing on same antenna: 58 MHz Interleaved channels: 14.5 MHz below main pattern (opposite polarization).
CCIR 382-5
*+]
CCIR 382-5
*+]
fo= 1903.0
&KDQ ,QWHUO 5)IUHT /2IUHT 7UDQVFHLYHU >$ @ >%@ >0+]@ >0+]@ 6\QWK VZLWFK >$ @ >%@
fo= 2101.0
&KDQ ,QWHUO 5)IUHT /2IUHT 7UDQVFHLYHU >0+]@ >0+]@ 6\QWK VZLWFK
1B 1A 2B 2A 3B 3A 4B 4A 5B 5A 6B 6A 1B 1A 2B 2A 3B 3A 4B 4A 5B 5A 6B 6A
1709.5 1724.0 1738.5 1753.0 1767.5 1782.0 1796.5 1811.0 1825.5 1840.0 1854.5 1869.0 1922.5 1937.0 1951.5 1966.0 1980.5 1995.0 2009.5 2024.0 2038.5 2053.0 2067.5 2082.0
1639.5 1654.0 1668.5 1683.0 1697.5 1712.0 1726.5 1741.0 1755.5 1770.0 1784.5 1799.0 1852.5 1867.0 1881.5 1896.0 1910.5 1925.0 1939.5 1954.0 1968.5 1983.0 1997.5 2012.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111
1B 1A 2B 2A 3B 3A 4B 4A 5B 5A 6B 6A 1B 1A 2B 2A 3B 3A 4B 4A 5B 5A 6B 6A
1907.5 1922.0 1936.5 1951.0 1965.5 1980.0 1994.5 2009.0 2023.5 2038.0 2052.5 2067.0 2120.5 2135.0 2149.5 2164.0 2178.5 2193.0 2207.5 2222.0 2236.5 2251.0 2265.5 2280.0
1837.5 1852.0 1866.5 1881.0 1895.5 1910.0 1924.5 1939.0 1953.5 1968.0 1982.5 1997.0 2050.5 2065.0 2079.5 2094.0 2108.5 2123.0 2137.5 2152.0 2166.5 2181.0 2195.5 2210.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111
242
B1078
Rev. Q
*+] ,785 &+$11 (/ &+$11(/ 5 ) ) 5( 4 6,'(%$1 $ % 0+ ] 6<17+ 6:,7&+
',/
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B
1713,5 1720,5 1727,5 1734,5 1741,5 1748,5 1755,5 1762,5 1769,5 1776,5 1783,5 1790,5 1832,5 1839,5 1846,5 1853,5 1860,5 1867,5 1874,5 1881,5 1888,5 1895,5 1902,5 1909,5
U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL DIL
00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111
B1078
Rev. Q
243
IV Freq. Setting
*+] ,785 &+$11(/ &+$11(/ 5))5(4 6,'(%$1 $ % 0+ ] 6<17+ 6:,7&+
',/
1905,5 1912,5 1919,5 1926,5 1933,5 1940,5 1947,5 1954,5 1961,5 1968,5 1975,5 1982,5 2024,5 2031,5 2038,5 2045,5 2052,5 2059,5 2066,5 2073,5 2080,5 2087,5 2094,5 2101,5
00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111
244
B1078
Rev. Q
*+] ,785 &+$11(/ &+$11(/ 5))5(4 6,'(%$1 $ % 0 +] 6<17+ 6:,7&+
',/
2108,5 2115,5 2122,5 2129,5 2136,5 2143,5 2150,5 2157,5 2164,5 2171,5 2178,5 2185,5 2227,5 2234,5 2241,5 2248,5 2255,5 2262,5 2269,5 2276,5 2283,5 2290,5 2297,5 2304,5
00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111
B1078
Rev. Q
245
IV Freq. Setting
*+] ,785 DQQH[ &+$11(/ &+$11(/ 5))5(4 6,'(%$1 $ % 0+ ] 6<17+ 6:,7&+
2308 2315 2322 2329 2336 2343 2350 2357 2364 2371 2378 2385 2402 2409 2416 2423 2430 2437 2444 2451 2458 2465 2472 2479
10000000 10000001 10000010 10000011 10000100 10000101 10000110 10000111 10001000 10001001 10001010 10001011 10001100 10001101 10001110 10001111 10010000 10010001 10010010 10010011 10010100 10010101 10010110 10010111
246
B1078
Rev. Q
2.3 - 2.5 GHz
Res. No. 2860 CNT/92 & 840 CNT/95
CHANNEL CHANNEL RF-FREQ. SIDEBAND SYNTH. SWITCH A# B# M Hz 87654321 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' 9' 10' 2311 2319 2327 2335 2343 2351 2359 2367 2375 2383 2405 2413 2421 2429 2437 2445 2453 2461 2469 2477 U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U 10100010 10100011 10100100 10100101 10100110 10100111 10101000 10101001 10101010 10101011 10101100 10101101 10101110 10101111 10110000 10110001 10110011 10110100 10110101
B1078
Rev. Q
247
IV Freq. Setting
10110010
2.5 - 2.7 GHz
ITU-R 283-5
CHANNEL CHANNEL RF-FRE- SIDEBAND SYNTH. SWITCH A# B# Q. M Hz 87654321 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 1A' 1B' 2A' 2B' 3A' 3B' 4A' 4B' 5A' 5B' 6A' 6B' 2491,5 2498,5 2505,5 2512,5 2519,5 2526,5 2533,5 2540,5 2547,5 2554,5 2561,5 2568,5 2610,5 2617,5 2624,5 2631,5 2638,5 2645,5 2652,5 2659,5 2666,5 2673,5 2680,5 2687,5 U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U 10000000 10000001 10000010 10000011 10000100 10000101 10000110 10000111 10001000 10001001 10001010 10001011 10001100 10001101 10001110 10001111 10010000 10010001 10010010 10010011 10010100 10010101 10010110 10010111
248
B1078
Rev. Q
*+] 6SHFLDO &+$11(/ 5))5(4 6,'(%$1 0 +] 6<17+ 6:,7&+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2488 2495 2502 2509 2516 2523 2530 2537 2544 2551 2558 2565 2607 2614 2621 2628 2635 2642 2649 2656 2663 2670 2677 2684
10011000 10011001 10011010 10011011 10011100 10011101 10011110 10011111 10100000 10100001 10100010 10100011 10100100 10100101 10100110 10100111 10101000 10101001 10101010 10101011 10101100 10101101 10101110 10101111
B1078
Rev. Q
249
IV Freq. Setting
2.5 - 2.7 GHz
T/R 13-01 E Annex D
CHANNEL CHANNEL RF-FREQ. SIDEBAND SYNTH. SWITCH A# B# M Hz 87654321 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 1A' 1B' 2A' 2B' 3A' 3B' 4A' 4B' 5A' 5B' 2526.50 2533.50 2540.50 2547.50 2554.50 2561.50 2568.50 2575.50 2582.50 2589.50 2600.50 2607.50 2614.50 2621.50 2628.50 2635.50 2642.50 2649.50 2656.50 2663.50 U U U U U U U U U U L L L L L L L L L L 10000101 10000110 10000111 10001000 10001001 10001010 10001011 10110000 10110001 10110010 00110011 00110100 00110101 00110110 00110111 00111000 00111001 00111010 00111011 00111100
250
B1078
Rev. Q
3.2
5 GHz
Channel [A#] Interl. [B#] B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B1' B2' B3' B4' B5' B6' RF-freq. [MHz] 4410.0 4424.5 4439.0 4453.5 4468.0 4482.5 4497.0 4511.5 4526.0 4540.5 4555.0 4569.5 4623.0 4637.5 4652.0 4666.5 4681.0 4695.5 4710.0 4724.5 4739.0 4753.5 4768.0 4782.5 LO-freq. [MHz] 4480.0 4494.5 4509.0 4523.5 4538.0 4552.5 4427.0 4441.5 4456.0 4470.5 4485.0 4499.5 4693.0 4707.5 4722.0 4736.5 4751.0 4765.5 4640.0 4654.5 4669.0 4683.5 4698.0 4712.5 Synth. Switch 87654321 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 10000110 10000111 10001000 10001001 10001010 10001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 10010010 10010011 10010100 10010101 10010110 10010111
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A1' A2' A3' A4' A5' A6'
B1078
Rev. Q
251
IV Freq. Setting
4.4 - 5.0 GHz ITU-R 1099 alternative 1 (40 M Hz spacing) CHANNEL CHANNEL RF-FREQ. SIDEBAND SYNTH. SWITCH A# B# M Hz 87654321 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N1' N2' N3' N4' N5' N6' N7' 4430 4470 4510 4550 4590 4630 4670 4730 4770 4810 4850 4890 4930 4970 L L L U U U U L L L L U U U 00000000 00000001 00000010 10000011 10000100 10000101 10000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 10001011 10001100 10001101
252
B1078
Rev. Q
4.4 -5.0 GHz CHANNEL CHANNEL RF-FREQ. SIDEBAND SYNTH. SWITCH A# B# M Hz 87654321 N1a N1b N1c N1d N2a N2b N2c N2d N3a N3b N3c N3d N4a N4b N4c N4d N5a N5b N5c N5d N6a N6b N6c N6d N7a N7b N7c N7d N1a' N1b' N1c' N1d' N2a' N2b' N2c' N2d' N3a' N3b' N3c' N3d' N4a' N4b' N4c' N4d' N5a' N5b' N5c' N5d' N6a' N6b' N6c' N6d' N7a' N7b' N7c' N7d' 4795 4805 4815 4825 4835 4845 4855 4865 4875 4885 4895 4905 4915 4925 4935 4945 4955 4965 4975 4985 4785 4775 L L L L L L L L L L U U U U U U U U U U U U 4765 L 4755 L 4745 L 4735 L 4725 L 4715 L 00101010 00101011 00101100 00101101 00101110 00110000 00110001 00110010 00110011 00110100 00110101 00110110 00110111 00111000 00111001 10111010 10111011 10111100 10111101 10111110 10111111 11000000 11000001 11000010 11000011 11000100 11000101 00101111 4685 U 10101001 4675 U 10101000 4665 U 10100111 4655 U 10100110 4645 U 10100101 4635 U 10100100 4625 U 10100011 4615 U 10100010 4605 U 10100001 4595 U 10100000 4585 U 10011111 4575 U 10011110 4565 U 10011101 4555 U 10011100 4545 U 10011011 4535 U 10011010 4525 L 00011001 4515 L 00011000 4505 L 00010111 4495 L 00010110 4485 L 00010101 4475 L 00010100 4465 L 00010011 4455 L 00010010 4445 L 00010001 4435 L 00010000 4425 L 00001111 4415 L 00001110
ITU-R 1099 alternative 1 (10 M Hz spacing)
B1078
Rev. Q
253
IV Freq. Setting
4.4 -5.0 GHz
ITU-R 746 annex3 (28 M Hz spacing)
CHANNEL CHANNEL RF-FREQ. SIDEBAND SYNTH. SWITCH A# B# M Hz 87654321 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N1' N2' N3' N4' N5' N6' N7' N8' N9' N10' 4418 4446 4474 4502 4530 4558 4586 4614 4642 4670 4730 4758 4786 4814 4842 4870 4898 4926 4954 4982 L L L L L U U U U U L L L L L U U U U U 01000110 01000111 01001000 01001001 01001010 11001011 11001100 11001101 11001110 11001111 01001101 01001110 01001111 01010000 01010001 11010010 11010011 11010100 11010101 11010110
254
B1078
Rev. Q
3.3
7 GHz
*+],7850+]VSDFLQJ &K QR 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'(%$1 6<17+6:,7&+ ',/
B1078
Rev. Q
255
IV Freq. Setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
7289 7296 7303 7310 7317 7324 7331 7338 7345 7352 7359 7366 7373 7380 7387 7394 7401 7408 7415 7422
7359 7366 7373 7380 7387 7394 7401 7408 7275 7282 7289 7296 7303 7310 7317 7324 7331 7338 7345 7352
L L L L L L L L U U U U U U U U U U U U
DIL 00010100 DIL 00010101 DIL 00010110 DIL 00010111 DIL 00011000 DIL 00011001 DIL 00011010 DIL 00011011 DIL 10011100 DIL 10011101 DIL 10011110 DIL 10011111 DIL 10100000 DIL 10100001 DIL 10100010 DIL 10100011 DIL 10100100 DIL 10100101 DIL 10100110 DIL 10100111
*+],785DQQH[0+]VSDFLQJ &K QR 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'(%$1 6<17+6:,7&+ ',/
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
7142 7170 7198 7226 7254 7296 7324 7352 7380 7408
7212 7240 7268 7156 7184 7366 7394 7282 7310 7338
L L L U U L L U U U
DIL 00101000 DIL 00101001 DIL 00101010 DIL 10101011 DIL 10101100 DIL 00101101 DIL 00101110 DIL 10101111 DIL 10110000 DIL 10110001
*+],785DQQH[ 0+]VSDFLQJLQWHUOHDYHG &K QR 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'(%$1 6<17+6:,7&+ ',/
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
7156 7184 7212 7240 7310 7338 7366 7394
7226 7254 7282 7170 7380 7408 7296 7324
L L L U L L U U
DIL 00110010 DIL 00110011 DIL 00110100 DIL 10110101 DIL 00110110 DIL 00110111 DIL 10111000 DIL 10111001
256
B1078
Rev. Q
*+]DGGLWLRQDOIUHTXHQFLHV &K QR 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'(%$1 6<17+6:,7&+ ',/
B1078
Rev. Q
257
IV Freq. Setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
7131,5 7138,5 7145,5 7152,5 7159,5 7166,5 7173,5 7180,5 7187,5 7194,5 7201,5 7208,5 7215,5 7222,5 7229,5 7236,5 7243,5 7250,5 7257,5 7264,5 7268 7271,5 7275,0
7201,5 7208,5 7215,5 7222,5 7229,5 7236,5 7243,5 7250,5 7257,5 7264,5 7271,5 7278,5 7285,5 7152,5 7159,5 7166,5 7173,5 7180,5 7187,5 7194,5 7198 7201,5 7205,0
L L L L L L L L L L L L L U U U U U U U U U U
DIL 00111010 DIL 00111011 DIL 00111100 DIL 00111101 DIL 00111110 DIL 00111111 DIL 01000000 DIL 01000001 DIL 01000010 DIL 01000011 DIL 01000100 DIL 01000101 DIL 01000110 DIL 11000111 DIL 11001000 DIL 11001001 DIL 11001010 DIL 11001011 DIL 11001100 DIL 11001101 DIL 11001110 DIL 11001111 DIL 11010000
7.4 GHz ITU-R 3855-6 (7M Hz spacing) CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 RF-FREQ. M Hz 7253 7260 7267 7274 7281 7288 7295 7302 7309 7316 7323 7330 7337 7344 7351 7358 7365 7372 7379 7386 SIDEBAND SYNTH.SWITCH DIL 87654321 L L L L L L L L L L L L L U U U U U U U DIL 00000000 DIL 00000001 DIL 00000010 DIL 00000011 DIL 00000100 DIL 00000101 DIL 00000110 DIL 00000111 DIL 00001000 DIL 00001001 DIL 00001010 DIL 00001011 DIL 00001100 DIL 10001101 DIL 10001110 DIL 10001111 DIL 10010000 DIL 10010001 DIL 10010010 DIL 10010011
258
B1078
Rev. Q
7.4 GHz ITU-R 3855-6 (7M Hz spacing) CHANNEL 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' 9' 10' 11' 12' 13' 14' 15' 16' 17' 18' 19' 20' RF-FREQ. M Hz 7414 7421 7428 7435 7442 7449 7456 7463 7470 7477 7484 7491 7498 7505 7512 7519 7526 7533 7540 7547 SIDEBAND SYNTH.SWITCH DIL 87654321 L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L U U U U U DIL 00010100 DIL 00010101 DIL 00010110 DIL 00010111 DIL 00011000 DIL 00011001 DIL 00011010 DIL 00011011 DIL 00011100 DIL 00011101 DIL 00011110 DIL 00011111 DIL 00100000 DIL 00100001 DIL 00100010 DIL 10100011 DIL 10100100 DIL 10100101 DIL 10100110 DIL 10100111
B1078
Rev. Q
259
IV Freq. Setting
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
7278,5 7282 7285,5 7292,5 7299,5 7306,5 7313,5 7320,5 7327,5 7334,5 7341,5 7348,5 7355,5 7362,5 7369,5 7376,5 7383,5 7390,5 7397,5 7404,5 7411,5 7418,5
7348,5 7352 7355,5 7362,5 7369,5 7376,5 7383,5 7390,5 7397,5 7404,5 7271,5 7278,5 7285,5 7292,5 7299,5 7306,5 7313,5 7320,5 7327,5 7334,5 7341,5 7348,5
L L L L L L L L L L U U U U U U U U U U U U
DIL 01010001 DIL 01010010 DIL 01010011 DIL 01010100 DIL 01010101 DIL 01010110 DIL 01010111 DIL 01011000 DIL 01011001 DIL 01011010 DIL 11011011 DIL 11011100 DIL 11011101 DIL 11011110 DIL 11011111 DIL 11100000 DIL 11100001 DIL 11100010 DIL 11100011 DIL 11100100 DIL 11100101 DIL 11100110
260
B1078
Rev. Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
7135,048 7146,71 7158,372 7170,034 7181,696 7193,358 7205,02 7216,682 7228,344 7240,006 7251,668 7263,33 7286,662 7298,324 7309,986 7321,648 7333,31 7344,972 7356,634 7368,296 7379,958 7391,62 7403,282 7414,944
7205,048 7216,71 7228,372 7240,034 7251,696 7263,358 7135,02 7146,682 7158,344 7170,006 7181,668 7193,33 7356,662 7368,324 7379,986 7391,648 7403,31 7414,972 7286,634 7298,296 7309,958 7321,62 7333,282 7344,944
L L L L L L U U U U U U L L L L L L U U U U U U
DIL 01100111 DIL 01101000 DIL 01101001 DIL 01101010 DIL 01101011 DIL 01101100 DIL 11101101 DIL 11101110 DIL 11101111 DIL 11110000 DIL 11110001 DIL 11110010 DIL 01110011 DIL 01110100 DIL 01110101 DIL 01110110 DIL 01110111 DIL 01111000 DIL 11111001 DIL 11111010 DIL 11111011 DIL 11111100 DIL 11111101 DIL 11111110
B1078
Rev. Q
261
IV Freq. Setting
*+],7850+]VSDFLQJ &KQR 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'(%$1 6<17+6:,7&+ ',/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
7428 7435 7442 7449 7456 7463 7470 7477 7484 7491 7498 7505 7512 7519 7526 7533 7540 7547 7554 7561
7498 7505 7512 7519 7526 7533 7540 7547 7554 7561 7568 7575 7582 7449 7456 7463 7470 7477 7484 7491
L L L L L L L L L L L L L U U U U U U U
262
B1078
Rev. Q
*+],7850+]VSDFLQJ &K QR 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'(%$1 6<17+6:,7&+ ',/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
7589 7596 7603 7610 7617 7624 7631 7638 7645 7652 7659 7666 7673 7680 7687 7694 7701 7708 7715 7722
7659 7666 7673 7680 7687 7694 7701 7708 7575 7582 7589 7596 7603 7610 7617 7624 7631 7638 7645 7652
L L L L L L L L U U U U U U U U U U U U
B1078
Rev. Q
263
IV Freq. Setting
*+],785DQQH[0+]VSDFLQJ &K QR 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'(%$1 6<17+6:,7&+ ',/
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
7442 7470 7498 7526 7554 7596 7624 7652 7680 7708
7512 7540 7568 7456 7484 7666 7694 7582 7610 7638
L L L U U L L U U U
DIL 00101000 DIL 00101001 DIL 00101010 DIL 10101011 DIL 10101100 DIL 00101101 DIL 00101110 DIL 10101111 DIL 10110000 DIL 10110001
*+],785DQQH[0+]VSDFLQJ LQWHUOHDYHG &K QR 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'(%$1 6<17+6:,7&+ ',/
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
7456 7484 7512 7540 7610 7638 7666 7694
7526 7554 7582 7470 7680 7708 7596 7624
L L L U L L U U
DIL 00110010 DIL 00110011 DIL 00110100 DIL 10110101 DIL 00110110 DIL 00110111 DIL 10111000 DIL 10111001
264
B1078
Rev. Q
B1078
Rev. Q
265
IV Freq. Setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
7431,5 7438,5 7445,5 7452,5 7459,5 7466,5 7473,5 7480,5 7487,5 7494,5 7501,5 7508,5 7515,5 7522,5 7529,5 7536,5 7543,5 7550,5 7557,5 7564,5 7568 7571,5 7575,0
7501,5 7508,5 7515,5 7522,5 7529,5 7536,5 7543,5 7550,5 7557,5 7564,5 7571,5 7578,5 7585,5 7452,5 7459,5 7466,5 7473,5 7480,5 7587,5 7494,5 7498 7501,5 7505
L L L L L L L L L L L L L U U U U U U U U U U
DIL 00111010 DIL 00111011 DIL 00111100 DIL 00111101 DIL 00111110 DIL 00111111 DIL 01000000 DIL 01000001 DIL 01000010 DIL 01000011 DIL 01000100 DIL 01000101 DIL 01000110 DIL 11000111 DIL 11001000 DIL 11001001 DIL 11001010 DIL 11001011 DIL 11001100 DIL 11001101 DIL 11001110 DIL 11001111 DIL 11010000
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
7578,5 7582 7585,5 7592,5 7599,5 7606,5 7613,5 7620,5 7627,5 7634,5 7641,5 7648,5 7655,5 7662,5 7669,5 7676,5 7683,5 7690,5 7697,5 7704,5 7711,5 7718,5
7648,5 7652 7655,5 7662,5 7669,5 7676,5 7683,5 7690,5 7697,5 7704,5 7571,5 7578,5 7585,5 7592,5 7599,5 7606,5 7613,5 7620,5 7627,5 7634,5 7641,5 7648,5
L L L L L L L L L L U U U U U U U U U U U U
DIL 01010001 DIL 01010010 DIL 01010011 DIL 01010100 DIL 01010101 DIL 01010110 DIL 01010111 DIL 01011000 DIL 01011001 DIL 01011010 DIL 11011011 DIL 11011100 DIL 11011101 DIL 11011110 DIL 11011111 DIL 11100000 DIL 11100001 DIL 11100010 DIL 11100011 DIL 11100100 DIL 11100101 DIL 11100110
266
B1078
Rev. Q
3.4
8 GHz
29.65 MHz channel spacing; ITU-R 386-4 Annex 1. 14 MHz channel spacing; ITU-R 386-4 Annex 3.
ITU-R recommendation 386-4 annex 1, 29.65 MHz spacing fn= f0-281.95+29.65n (lower) fn= f0-29.37+29.65n (upper) f0= 8000MHz n=1, 2, 3.....8 Ch.
no. n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RF-freq. (MHz) 7747,70 7777,35 7807,00 7836,65 7866,30 7895,95 7925,60 7955,25 8059,02 8088,67 8118,32 8147,97 8177,62 8207,27 8236,92 8266,57 LO-freq. (MHz) 7817,70 7847,35 7877,00 7906,65 7796,30 7825,95 7855,60 7885,25 8129,02 8158,67 8188,32 8217,97 8107,62 8137,27 8166,92 8196,57
Freq
No.in PROM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Dip switch Sideb. 1:USB PROM 0:LSB adress 0 0110000 0 0110001 0 0110010 0 0110011 1 0110100 1 0110101 1 0110110 1 0110111 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0111000 0111001 0111010 0111011 0111100 0111101 0111110 0111111
5' 6' 7' 8'
B1078
Rev. Q
267
IV Freq. Setting
1' 2' 3' 4'
ITU-R recommendation 386-4 annex 3, 14 MHz spacing fn= f0-108.5+14n (lower) fn= f0-10.5+14n (upper) f0= 8387.5MHz n=1, 2, 3...6 Ch.
no. n 1 2 3 4 5 6
RF-freq. (MHz) 8293 8307 8321 8335 8349 8363 8412 8426 8440 8454 8468 8482
LO-freq. (MHz) 8363 8377 8391 8265 8279 8293 8482 8496 8510 8384 8398 8412
No.in PROM 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Freq
Dip switch Sideb. 1:USB PROM 0:LSB adress 0 1000000 0 1000001 0 1000010 1 1000011 1 1000100 1 1000101 0 0 0 1 1 1 1000110 1000111 1001000 1001001 1001010 1001011
1' 2' 3' 4'

5' 6'
268
B1078
Rev. Q
3.5
13 GHz
*+],785 0$,1 &+$1 &K QR )5(4 3$77(5 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'( %$1' 6<17+ 6:,7&+',/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C C A C C B C C A C C B C C A C C B C C A C C B
12754,5 12758 12761,5 12765 12768,5 12772 12775,5 12779 12782,5 12786 12789,5 12793 12796,5 12800 12803,5 12807 12810,5 12814 12817,5 12821 12824,5 12828 12831,5 12835 12838,5 12842 12845,5 12849 12852,5 12856 12859,5 12863
12824,5 12828 12831,5 12835 12838,5 12842 12845,5 12849 12852,5 12856 12859,5 12863 12866,5 12870 12873,5 12877 12880,5 12884 12887,5 12891 12894,5 12898 12901,5 12905 12908,5 12912 12915,5 12919 12922,5 12926 12929,5 12933
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
DIL 00000000 DIL 00000001 DIL 00000010 DIL 00000011 DIL 00000100 DIL 00000101 DIL 00000110 DIL 00000111 DIL 00001000 DIL 00001001 DIL 00001010 DIL 00001011 DIL 00001100 DIL 00001101 DIL 00001110 DIL 00001111 DIL 00010000 DIL 00010001 DIL 00010010 DIL 00010011 DIL 00010100 DIL 00010101 DIL 00010110 DIL 00010111 DIL 00011000 DIL 00011001 DIL 00011010 DIL 00011011 DIL 00011100 DIL 00011101 DIL 00011110 DIL 00011111
A: Frequency pattern according to ITU-R 497-4 rec. 1; 28 MHz spacing. B: Frequency pattern according to ITU-R 497-4 rec. 7 (interleave); 28 MHz spacing. C: Frequency pattern according to ITU-R 497-4 rec. 10 - Alt I; 7 MHz spacing.
B1078
Rev. Q
269
IV Freq. Setting
*+],785 0$,1 &+$ &K QR )5(4 3$77(5 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'( %$1' 6<17+ 6:,7&+',/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13020,5 13024 13027,5 13031 13034,5 13038 13041,5 13045 13048,5 13052 13055,5 13059 13062,5 13066 13069,5 13073 13076,5 13080 13083,5 13087 13090,5 13094 13097,5 13101 13104,5 13108 13111,5 13115 13118,5 13122 13125,5 13129
13090,5 13094 13097,5 13101 13104,5 13108 13111,5 13115 13118,5 13122 13125,5 13129 13132,5 13136 13139,5 13133 13146,5 13150 13153,5 13157 13160,5 13164 13167,5 13171 13034,5 13038 13041,5 13045 13048,5 13052 13055,5 13059
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L U U U U U U U U
270
B1078
Rev. Q
*+],785 0$,1 &K &+$ QR )5(4 3$77(5 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'( %$1' 6<17+ 6:,7&+',/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12866,5 12870 12873,5 12877 12880,5 12884 12887,5 12891 12894,5 12898 12901,5 12905 12908,5 12912 12915,5 12919 12922,5 12926 12929,5 12933 12936,5 12940 12943,5 12947 12950,5 12954 12957,5 12961 12964,5 12968 12971,5 12975
12936,5 12940 12943,5 12947 12950,5 12954 12957,5 12961 12824,5 12828 12831,5 12835 12838,5 12842 12845,5 12849 12852,5 12856 12859,5 12863 12866,5 12870 12873,5 12877 12880,5 12884 12887,5 12891 12894,5 12898 12901,5 12905
L L L L L L L L U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
B1078
Rev. Q
271
IV Freq. Setting
*+],785 0$,1 &+$1 &K QR )5(4 3$77(5 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6,'( %$1' 6<17+6:,7&+ ',/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13132,5 13136 13139,5 13143 13146,5 13150 13153,5 13157 13160,5 13164 13167,5 13171 13174,5 13178 13181,5 13185 13188,5 13192 13195,5 13199 13202,5 13206 13209,5 13213 13216,5 13220 13223,5 13227 13230,5 13234 13237,5 13241
13062,5 13066 13069,5 13073 13076,5 13080 13083,5 131087 13090,5 13094 13097,5 13101 13104,5 13108 13111,5 13115 13118,5 13122 13125,5 13129 13132,5 13136 13139,5 13143 13146,5 13150 13153,5 13157 13160,5 13164 13167,5 13171
U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
272
B1078
Rev. Q
3.6
15 GHz
*+],7855HF0+]VSDFLQJ &+$11(/ 5))5(4 &+$11(/ *+] 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6<17+ 6:,7&+',/
1a 1b 1c 1d 2a 2b 2c 2d 3a 3b 3c 3d 4a 4b 4c 4d 5a 5b 5c 5d 6a 6b 6c 6d 7a 7b 7c 7d 8a 8b
14,5045 14,5115 14,5185 14,5255 14,5325 14,5395 14,5465 14,5535 14,5605 14,5675 14,5745 14,5815 14,5885 14,5955 14,6025 14,6095 14,6165 14,6235 14,6305 14,6375 14,6445 14,6515 14,6585 14,6655 14,6725 14,6795 14,6865 14,6935 14,7005 14,7075
1a 1b 1c 1d 2a 2b 2c 2d 3a 3b 3c 3d 4a 4b 4c 4d 5a 5b 5c 5d 6a 6b 6c 6d 7a 7b 7c 7d 8a 8b
14,9245 14,9315 14,9385 14,9455 14,9525 14,9595 14,9665 14,9735 14,9805 14,9875 14,9945 15,0015 15,0085 15,0155 15,0225 15,0295 15,0365 15,0435 15,0505 15,0575 15,0645 15,0715 15,0785 15,0855 15,0925 15,0995 15,1065 15,1135 15,1205 15,1275
13,5945 13,6015 13,6085 13,6155 13,6225 13,6295 13,6365 13,6435 13,6505 13,6575 13,6645 13,6715 13,6785 13,6855 13,6925 13,6995 13,7065 13,7135 13,7205 13,7275 13,7345 13,7415 13,7485 13,7555 13,7625 13,7695 13,7765 13,7835 13,7905 13,7975
DIL 00000000 DIL 00000001 DIL 00000010 DIL 00000011 DIL 00000100 DIL 00000101 DIL 00000110 DIL 00000111 DIL 00001000 DIL 00001001 DIL 00001010 DIL 00001011 DIL 00001100 DIL 00001101 DIL 00001110 DIL 00001111 DIL 00010000 DIL 00010001 DIL 00010010 DIL 00010011 DIL 00010100 DIL 00010101 DIL 00010110 DIL 00010111 DIL 00011000 DIL 00011001 DIL 00011010 DIL 00011011 DIL 00011100 DIL 00011101
B1078
Rev. Q
273
IV Freq. Setting
*+],7855HF0+]VSDFLQJ &+$11(/ 5))5(4 &+$11(/ *+] 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6<17+ 6:,7&+',/
8c 8d 9a 9b 9c 9d 10a 10b 10c 10d 11a 11b 11c 11d 12a 12b 12c 12d 13a 13b 13c 13d 14a 14b 14c 14d 15a 15b 15c 15d
14,7145 14,7215 14,7285 14,7355 14,7425 14,7495 14,7565 14,7635 14,7705 14,7775 14,7845 14,7915 14,7985 14,8055 14,8125 14,8195 14,8265 14,8335 14,8405 14,8475 14,8545 14,8615 14,8685 14,8755 14,8825 14,8895 14,8965 14,9035 14,9105 14,9175
8c 8d 9a 9b 9c 9d 10a 10b 10c 10d 11a 11b 11c 11d 12a 12b 12c 12d 13a 13b 13c 13d 14a 14b 14c 14d 15a 15b 15c 15d
15,1345 15,1415 15,1485 15,1555 15,1625 15,1695 15,1765 15,1835 15,1905 15,1975 15,2045 15,2115 15,2185 15,2255 15,2325 15,2395 15,2465 15,2535 15,2605 15,2675 15,2745 15,2815 15,2885 15,2955 15,3025 15,3095 15,3165 15,3235 15,3305 15,3375
13,8045 13,8115 13,8185 13,8255 13,8325 13,8395 13,8465 13,8535 13,8605 13,8675 13,8745 13,8815 13,8885 13,8955 13,9025 13,9095 13,9165 13,9235 13,9305 13,9375 13,9445 13,9515 13,9585 13,9655 13,9725 13,9795 13,9865 13,9935 14,0005 14,0075
274
B1078
Rev. Q
*+],7855HF$0+]VSDFLQJ *+],7855HF$%0+]VSDFLQJ &+$11(/ 5))5(4 &+$11(/ *+] 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6<17+ 6:,7&+',/
B1078
Rev. Q
275
IV Freq. Setting
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B 8A 8B 9A 9B 10A 10B 11A 11B 12A 12B 13A 13B 14A 14B 15A 15B
14,515 14,529 14,543 14,557 14,571 14,585 14,599 14,613 14,627 14,641 14,655 14,669 14,683 14,697 14,711 14,725 14,739 14,753 14,767 14,781 14,795 14,809 14,823 14,837 14,851 14,865 14,879 14,893 14,907 14,921
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B 8A 8B 9A 9B 10A 10B 11A 11B 12A 12B 13A 13B 14A 14B 15A 15B
14,935 14,949 14,963 14,977 14,991 15,005 15,019 15,033 15,047 15,061 15,075 15,089 15,103 15,117 15,131 15,145 15,159 15,173 15,187 15,201 15,215 15,229 15,243 15,257 15,271 15,285 15,299 15,313 15,327 15,341
13,605 13,619 13,633 13,647 13,661 13,675 13,689 13,703 13,717 13,731 13,745 13,759 13,773 13,787 13,801 13,815 13,829 13,843 13,857 13,871 13,885 13,899 13,913 13,927 13,941 13,955 13,969 13,983 13,997 14,011
*+]6SHFLDO &+$11(/ 5))5(4 &+$11(/ *+] 5))5(4 0+] /2)5(4 0+] 6<17+ 6:,7&+',/
Sp.1 Sp.2 Sp.3 Sp.4 Sp.5 Sp.6 Sp.7 Sp.8 Sp.9 Sp.10 Sp.11 Sp.12 Sp.13 Sp.14 Sp.15 Sp.16 Sp.17 Sp.18 Sp.19 Sp.20 Sp.21 Sp.22 Sp.23 Sp.24 Sp.25 Sp.26 Sp.27 Sp.28 Sp.29 Sp.30
14,508 14,522 14,536 14,55 14,564 14,578 14,592 14,606 14,62 14,634 14,648 14,662 14,676 14,69 14,704 14,718 14,732 14,746 14,76 14,774 14,788 14,802 14,816 14,83 14,844 14,858 14,872 14,886 14,9 14,914
Sp.1 Sp.2 Sp.3 Sp.4 Sp.5 Sp.6 Sp.7 Sp.8 Sp.9 Sp.10 Sp.11 Sp.12 Sp.13 Sp.14 Sp.15 Sp.16 Sp.17 Sp.18 Sp.19 Sp.20 Sp.21 Sp.22 Sp.23 Sp.24 Sp.25 Sp.26 Sp.27 Sp.28 Sp.29 Sp.30
14,928 14,942 14,956 14,97 14,984 14,998 15,012 15,026 15,04 15,054 15,068 15,082 15,096 15,11 15,124 15,138 15,152 15,166 15,18 15,194 15,208 15,222 15,236 15,25 15,264 15,278 15,292 15,306 15,32 15,334
13,598 13,612 13,626 13,64 13,654 13,668 13,682 13,696 13,71 13,724 13,738 13,752 13,766 13,78 13,794 13,808 13,822 13,836 13,85 13,864 13,878 13,892 13,906 13,92 13,934 13,948 13,962 13,976 13,99 14,004
276
B1078
Rev. Q
SECTION V
Fault Finding
B1078
Rev. Q
277
V Fault Finding

278
B1078 Rev. Q
1.0
GENERAL
The two main equipment alarm, Urgent Alarm and Main Alarm, outputs are both given through relays, situated at the lower part of the baseband backplane. The same outputs are also connected to external outputs at the top of the rack, where red LEDs for each alarm are situated. The trouble shooting procedures only requires a HandHeld Terminal, (HHT). Note! The Trouble Shooting procedures are intended as a guideline for fault location and may not cover all fault constellations.
2.0
SYSTEM TROUBLE SHOOTING BY MEANS OF THE HHT

All trouble shooting is based on the use of the HandHeld Terminal (HHT). By means of this unit, the internal unit and board alarms can be checked and the unit which contains the faulty circuit, can be identified. The faulty unit or board has then to be replaced with a new one. Some simple precautions has to be taken to avoid transmission interruption on other channels, 1+1 and 2+1 systems, in the equipment. The trouble shooting procedures are split in two parts, depending on whether the Urgent Alarm is lit or not. The Urgent Alarm is the most important of the two main equipment alarms while the Main Alarm is the most general alarm in the system and thereby most likely to be observed as it includes all subalarms. The Main Alarm is thus always checked out first when an alarm situation occurs and if the Urgent Alarm is also observed, the fault finding procedure is done on the basis of this.
V Fault Finding
The flow chart based fault finding procedures are shown in chapter 3, "ERROR CHECKING FLOW CHARTS". All named alarms are listed in chapter 4.0, "ALARM LIST".
2.1
Main Alarm
The Main Alarm, red LED, is situated on the top of the equipment rack above the Urgent Alarm LED. When this LED is lit an internal equipment
B1078
Rev. Q
279
alarm is detected on one or more units or boards. This alarm LED is also lit when the Urgent Alarm is on but not vice versa. The cause of the alarm may not be disastrous for the equipment and thus not need immediate action. If the Urgent Alarm is on, the trouble shooting procedure for that situation is used.
2.1.1
Fault finding
The procedure starts with the "Error Checking Procedure" proceeding to "Main Alarm Error Checking Procedure, Part 1", then Part 2 etc. When the faulty unit or board is located, the next action is to change it by a new one.
2.2
Urgent Alarm
The Urgent Alarm, red LED, is situated at the top of the equipment rack. When this LED is lit, it indicates a total 34 Mb/s main data transmission loss in one or more channels in the equipment. On 16x2 Mb/s systems it indicates that all the 2Mb/s channels, possibly except the 2 Mb/s wayside, are lost. Insertion channels may also be lost while the alarm is on, but that situation is not a required condition to trigger the alarm. This alarm requires immediate action to restore data transmission.
2.2.1
Fault finding
First action is to check if the Main Alarm is present, if not, there is an error in the Supervisory Unit causing erroneous protection switching on the transmit side. If the Main Alarm is present, the next action is to identify the channel which has the transmission break down. This is done by first using the "Urgent Alarm Error Checking Procedure" to verify if the faulty channel has error in the RCVR or XMTR direction. The next action is to check the RCVR or XMTR direction by using the "Error Checking Procedure, RCVR Direction" or the " Error Checking Procedure, XMTR Direction", depending on the one selected above.
3.0
ERROR CHECKING FLOW CHARTS

The following flow charts are divided in two parts; one for the Main Alarm and another for the Urgent Alarm. When Urgent Alarm is detected, this part is used first and then the Main Alarm part.
280
B1078
Rev. Q
3.1
Main Alarm Flow Charts

This chapter shows flow chart for the Main Alarm error checking procedure
ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE.
MAIN ALARM
GO TO URGENT ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE
YES
URGENT ALARM ALSO PRESENT?
NO
CHECK ALL BASEBAND SHELF POWER SUPLY ALARMS PWR_ALM?
YES
POSSIBLE ERROR IN BASEBAND SHELF POWER SUPPLY
NO GO TO CHANNEL DEPENDENT ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL N
MAIN ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE; PART 1
EXIT
B1078
Rev. Q
281
V Fault Finding
0$,1$/$50(5525&+(&.,1*352&('85(3$57
0$,1$/$50
6<67(0(5525352&('85(
5$',2 +27 <(6 67$1'%< 6<67(0" 12 63$&( ',9(5&,7< 6<67(0" 12 6+(/)32:(5 6833/<$/$50 &+(&. 3:5B$/0" 3:5B$/0" <(6 3266,%/((5525,1 5$',26+(/)32:(5 6833/<
12
<(6
63$&( 12 +27B67%<B$/0" ',9(5&,7< 5(&(,9(5 12
63$&( ',9(5&,7< 5(&(,9(5 <(6 3266,%/((5525,1 %5$1&+,1*$17(11$ 252127+(567$7,21
5)B,1387B$/0" /2B$/0"
<(6
<(6
12
3266,%/((5525,1 63$&(',9(5&,7< 5(&(,9(5
63B&217B$/0" 3266,%/((5525 ,1+2767$1'%< &21752/%2$5'25 &2$;,$/6:,7&+ 63B&20%B$/0" ,)B,13B(4/B $/0"
<(6
63$&(B',9 &21752/B$/0"
<(6
3266,%/((5525,1 63$&(',9(5&,7< &21752//(5%2$5'
12
12
75$16 &(,9(5 12 3266,%/((5525,1 75$16&(,9(581,7 ,)B,1387B$/0" 75$16&(,9(5 <(6 3:5B287B$/0" /2B$/0" ,)B,1387B$/0" 63B&20%B$/0" <(6 3266,%/((5525,1 63$&(',9(5&,7< &20%,1(5%2$5'
3266,%/((5525,1 %5$1&+,1*$17(11$ 252127+(5 67$7,21
<(6
12
12
3266,%/((5525,1 02'(0%2$5'25 ,)&211(&7,216 %(7:((102'(0 $1'75$16&(,9(5 12 ,13B02'B$/0" <(6 5)B,13B$/0
12 ,)B,13B(4/B$/0"
<(6
3266,%/((5525,1 (48$/,=(5/,1(%2$5' 25,)B&21B(&7,216
<(6
12
352&(('720$,1$/$50(5525&+(&.,1*352&('85(3$57
282
B1078
Rev. Q
MAIN ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE, PART 2
CONTINUED FROM "MAIN ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE, PART 1"
YES
NO DEMOD_ALM?
MODEM
YES
IF_INPUT_ALM?
CHECK IF-CONN. BETWEEN MODEM NO AND TRANSCEIVER OK?
CORRECT IF-CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MODEM AND TRANSCEIVER
NO
YES
POSSIBLE ERROR IN MODEM BOARD
POSSIBLE ERROR IN TRANSCEIVER UNIT
INP1_34MB_ALM?
YES
POSSIBLE ERROR IN ALIGNMENT/SWITCH/ HYBRID BOARD
NO
YES
INP_2MB_ALM?
2 Mb/s ADAPTER PRESENT?
YES
POSSIBLE ERROR IN 2 Mb/s ADAPTER BOARD OR IN 2 Mb/s DATA INPUT CONNECTION
NO
NO
POSSIBLE ERROR IN 2 Mb/s DATA INPUT CONNECTION
INS_PLL_ALM? EXT_PLL_ALM? MAN_SW_ALM?
YES MAN_SW_ALM?
YES
MANUAL SWITCH ON FRONT OF BIT INSERT/ EXTRACT/ACU BOARD IN LOCKED POSITION
NO
NO
POSSIBLE ERROR IN BIT INSERT/EXTRACT/ ACU BOARD
YES INP3_34MB_ALM?
NO
RF_SL_HOP_0? HBER_HOP_0?
YES
POSSIBLE ERROR ON OTHER STATION OR DEGRADED TRANSMISSION PATH
INP_REG_ALM? INP_PROT_ALM?
YES
POSSIBLE ERROR IN CORRESPONDING BIT INSERT/EXTRACT/ ACU BOARD
NO
PROCEED TO "MAIN ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE, PART 3"
B1078
Rev. Q
283
V Fault Finding
POSSIBLE ERROR IN MAIN DATA CONNECTION TO CH P IN DDFPANEL
NO
MAIN ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE, PART 3
CONTINUED FROM "MAIN ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE, PART 2"
YES
INP_HDB3_ALM?
CHECK MAIN DATA INPUT TO EQUIPMENT AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
NO
OUTPUT_ALM? YES ALIGN_PLL_ALM? MAN_SW_EN?
YES MAN_SW_EN?
MANUAL SWITCH ON FRONT OF ALIGNMENT/ SWITCH/HYBRID BOARD IN LOCKED POSITION
NO
NO
EXPRESS_ALM? OMNIBUS_ALM?
YES EXPRESS_ALM?
YES
POSSIBLE ERROR IN EXPRESS TELEPHONE BOARD
NO
NO
POSSIBLE ERROR IN OMNIBUS TELEPHONE BOARD
ADAPT1_ALM? ADAPT2_ALM? ADAPT3_ALM? ADAPT4_ALM?
YES
POSSIBLE ERROR IN CORRESPONDING ADAPTER BOARD, POSITION 1..4
NO
YES ADAPT_ALM?
POSSIBLE ERROR FROM ADDITIONAL ADAPTER SHELF. CHECK ALL ADAPTER BOARD LEDs
NO
SUB_ALM? BYPASS_352?
YES
POSSIBLE ERROR IN SUPERVISORY & SUBINSERT BOARD
NO
RETURN TO ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE
284
B1078
Rev. Q
URGENT ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE
URGENT ALARM
YES CH1?
CH1 FAULTY
NO
YES CH2?
CH2 FAULTY
NO
NO CHP?
YES
CHP FAULTY
YES
URGENT_ALM_XMT?
NO
GO TO CHANNEL DEPENDENT ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE XMTR DIRECTION
GO TO CHANNEL DEPENDENT ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE RCVR DIRECTION
URGENT ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE XMTR DIRECTION
URGENT ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE RCVR DIRECTION
EXIT
B1078
Rev. Q
285
V Fault Finding
URGENT ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE, XMTR DIRECTION

START XMTR DIRECTION ERROR CHECKING
RADIO SHELF POWER YES SUPPLY ALARM CHECK

PWR_ALM?
POSSIBLE ERROR IN RADIO SHELF POWER SUPPLY
NO
HOT STANDBY SYSTEM?
YES HOT_STBY_ALM?
YES
POSSIBLE ERROR IN HOT STANDBY CONTROLUNIT OR COAXIAL SWITCH
NO
NO
YES PWR_OUT_ALM? LO_ALM? TRANSCEIVER IF_INP_ALM?
NO
POSSIBLE ERROR IN TRANSCEIVER UNIT
NO
YES
YES INP_MOD_ALM? INP_MOD_ALM?
NO
NO
YES
INP1_34MB_ALM? INP2_34MB_ALM? INS_PLL_ALM?
YES
YES INS_PLL_ALM?
POSSIBLE ERROR IN BIT INSERT/EXTRACT/ ACU BOARD
NO
NO
RETURN TO URGENT ALARM ERROR CHECKING PROCEDURE
286
B1078
Rev. Q
85*(17$/$50(5525&+(&.,1*352&('85(5&95',5(&7,21
67$575&95',5(&7,21 (5525&+(&.,1*
5$',2
12
63$&( ',9(56,7< 6<67(0"
12
6+(/)32: (5 6833/<$/$50 &+(&. 3:5B$/0" 3:5B$/0"
<(6
3266 ,%/((5525,1 5$',26+(/)32:(5 6833/<
<(6
63B&217B$/0" 63B&20%B$/0"
<(6 63B&217B$/0"
<(6
3266 ,%/(( 5525,1 63$&( ',9(5&,7< &21752//(5%2$5'
12
12
3266,%/((5525,1 63$&( ',9(5&,7< &20%,1(5 %2$5'
<(6 ,)B,1387B$/0" /2B$/0" /2B$/0"
<(6
3266,%/((5525,1 75$16&(,9( 581,7
12
12
3266,%/((5525,1 $17(11$25%5$1 &+,1*81,7,)127 &+(&.27+(567$7,21
&+(&.&211(&7,21 %(7: ((175$16 &(,9(5 $1'02'(0
<(6 02'(0 ,)B,1387B$/0"
<(6 '(02'B$/0"
12
12
3266,%/((5525,1 02'( 0%2$5'
(;7B3//B$/0" 5)B6/B6(&B" 5)B6 /B+23B"
12
$/,*1B3//B$/0" ,13B$/0B5(*" ,13B$/0B3527" 2 873B$/0"
<(6
3266 ,%/(( 5525,1 $/,*10(176:,7&+ +<%5,'%2$5'
$&881,721%,7 3266 ,%/((5525,1 ,16(57(;75$&7$&8 %2$5' ,16(57(; 75$&7$&8 %2$5'
5(78517285*(17$/$50(5525&+(&.,1*352&('85(
B1078
Rev. Q
287
V Fault Finding
<(6
12
3266,%/((5525,1
4.0
ALARM LIST
The following tables shows all alarms collected by each ACU, situated on the Bitinsert/extract/ACU-board. The ACU collects all channel specific alarms and alarms from all common units, that is all baseband boards situated in the lower shelf, except the Bitinsert/extract/ACU-board. Channel specific alarms are alarms from each channel in a 1+1, 2+1, 2+0 or 3+0 system. Common unit alarms is collected by all ACUs in the system in parallel.
$ODUP
Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 5 Indicat 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Indicat 9 Alarm 10 Alarm 11 Alarm 12 Alarm 13 Indicat 14 Alarm 15 Indicat 16 Alarm 17 Alarm 18 Alarm 19 Alarm 20 Alarm 21 Alarm 22 Alarm 23 Alarm 24 Alarm 25
1DPH
INP_HDB3_ALM (I) INP_REG_ALM (I) INP_PROT_ALM (I) OUTPUT_ALM (I) ALIGN_PLL_ALM (I) ACTIVE_CH (I) MAN_SW_EN (I) INP_HDB3_ALM (II) AIS_ALIGN (I) INP_PROT_ALM (II) INP_REG_ALM (II) OUTPUT_ALM (II) ALIGN_PLL_ALM (II) ACTIVE_CH (II) MAN_SW_EN (II) AIS_ALIGN (II) EXPRESS_ALM BYPASS_352 OMNIBUS_ALM BYPASS_352_SHE ADAPT2_ALM ADAPT1_ALM ADAPT3_ALM PWR3_ALM PWR5_ALM
'HVFULSWLRQ
INP_HDB3_ALM from Alignment I INP_REG_ALM from Alignment I INP_PROT_ALM from Alignment I OUTPUT_ALM from Alignment I ALIGN_PLL_ALM from Alignment I ACTIVE_CH from Alignment I (H = Ch1 og L = ChP) MAN_SW_EN from Alignment I INP_HDB3_ALM from Alignment II AIS_ALIGN out from Alignment I INP_PROT_ALM from Alignment II INP_REG_ALM from Alignment II OUTPUT_ALM from Alignment II ALIGN_PLL_ALM from Alignment II ACTIVE_CH from Alignment II (H = Ch1 og L = ChP) MAN_SW_EN from Alignment II AIS_ALIGN out from Alignment II Unit alarm own board position no. 4 Bypass signal from own SU & Subinsert, bd. pos. no. 6 Unit alarm own board position no. 5 Bypass signal from other SU & Subinsert, bd. pos. no. 6. On repeater. Unit alarm own adapter position no. 2 Unit alarm own adapter position no. 1 Unit alarm own adapter position no. 3 Unit alarm power supply own adapter position no. 6 Unit alarm power supply other adapter position no. 6
288
B1078
Rev. Q
$ODUP
Alarm 18 Alarm 19 Alarm 20 Alarm 21 Alarm 22 Alarm 23 Alarm 24 Alarm 25 Alarm 26 Alarm 27 Alarm 28 Alarm 29 Alarm 30 Alarm 31 Alarm 32 Alarm 33 Alarm 34 Alarm 35 Alarm 36 Alarm 37 Alarm 38 Alarm 39 Alarm 40 Alarm 41 Alarm 42 Alarm 43 Alarm 44 Alarm 45 Alarm 46 Alarm 47
1DPH
BYPASS_352 OMNIBUS_ALM BYPASS_352_SHELF ADAPT2_ALM ADAPT1_ALM ADAPT3_ALM PWR3_ALM PWR5_ALM PWR4_ALM ADAPT4_ALM ADAPT5_ALM ADAPT6_ALM ADAPT7_ALM ADAPT8_ALM ADAPT9_ALM PWR_OUT_ALM RF_INPUT_ALM LO_ALM IF_INPUT_ALM PWR1_ALM PWR2_ALM HOT_STBY_ALM IF_INPUT_ALM INP_MOD_ALM DEMOD_ALM
'HVFULSWLRQ
Bypass signal from own SU & Subinsert, bd. pos. no. 6 Unit alarm own board position no. 5 Bypass signal from other SU & Subinsert, bd. pos. no. 6. On repeater. Unit alarm own adapter position no. 2 Unit alarm own adapter position no. 1 Unit alarm own adapter position no. 3 Unit alarm power supply own adapter position no. 6 Unit alarm power supply other adapter position no. 6 Unit alarm power supply own adapter position no. 5 Unit alarm own adapter position no. 4 Unit alarm other adapter position no. 1 Unit alarm other adapter position no. 2 Unit alarm other adapter position no. 3 Unit alarm other adapter position no. 4 Unit alarm other adapter position no. 5 Int alm, RF-power out from transmitter (main) R1 Int alm, RF-input level to receiver (main) - R2 Int alm, Sync Loss synthesizer (main) - R3 Int alm, IF-input level to transmitter (main) - R4 Int alm, Power supply 1 - pos. no. 6 (main) - R6 Int alm, Power supply 2 - pos. no. 5 (space) R7 Int alm, Hot standby switch control alarm - R8 Int alm, IF-input level to modem (modem) - R9 Int alm, Input alarm to modem. (modem) - R10 Int alm, Demodulator. (collective) alarm (modem) - R11 Not used
RF_INPUT_ALM LO_ALM SD_MNL_LOCK_ALM SD_CONT_ALM
Int alm, RF-input level to receiver (space) - R13 Int alm, Sync Loss synthesizer (space) - R14 Alarm from Space Diversity Controller board. Manually locked Alarm from Space Diversity Controller board. Board alarm
B1078
Rev. Q
289
V Fault Finding
$ODUP
Alarm 48 Indicat 49 Alarm 50 Indicat 51 Indicat 52 Indicat 53 Alarm 54 Alarm 55 Alarm 56 Alarm 57 Alarm 58 Alarm 59 Alarm 60 Alarm 61 Alarm 62 Alarm 63 Alarm 64 Alarm 65 Alarm 66 Alarm 67 Alarm 68 Alarm 69 Alarm 70 Alarm 71 Alarm 72
1DPH
SD_COMB_ALM HOT_STBY_IND IF_INP_EQL_ALM 2MB_ADAP_CONF AIS_2MB_ADAPT_IND SPARE_EW EXPRESS2_ALM OMNIBUS2_ALM ADAPT_ALM INP1_34MB_ALM INP2_34MB_ALM INP3_34MB_ALM INP_2MB_ALM INS_PLL_ALM EXT_PLL_ALM SUB_ALM MAN_SW_ALM AIS_34MB_EXT_IND AIS_2MB_EXT_IND RF_SL_SEC_O RF_SL_HOP_O HBER_HOP_O LBER_HOP_O XS_STAT_0 XS_STAT_1
'HVFULSWLRQ
Alarm from Space Diversity Combiner board. Board alarm Int ind, position indicator from Hot standby switch - R19 Int alm, alarm from equalizer line Bd - R20 Ext ind, 2 Mb/s Adapter configuration status Ext ind, AIS transmitted from 2 Mb/s Adapter Int ind, Early Warning (Spare) - R23 Unit alarm from other board position no. 4 Unit alarm from other board position no. 5 Int alm, Combined alarm from all adapters in extra shelf Int alm, Input alarm in XMTR_SW input no. 1 (bb) Int alm, Input alarm in XMTR_SW input no. 2 (bb) Int alm, Input alarm in XMTR_SW input no. 3 (bb) Int alm, Input alarm on 2 Mb/s wayside-input (bb) Int alm, PLL alarm in 37.356 MHz insert-PLL (bb) Int alm, PLL alarm in 34.368 MHz extract-PLL (bb) Alarm from own Subinsert unit Int alm, alarm when manual XMTR_SW activated (bb) Int ind, AIS detected from RCVR DISTR (bb) Int ind, AIS detected on 2 Mb/s wayside output (bb) Int alm, RF-Sync Loss, section (bb) Int alm, RF-Sync Loss last hop (bb) Int alm, High BER last hop (bb) Int ind, Low BER last hop (bb) Int ind, status on lsb, XMTR_SW (bb) Int ind, status on msb, XMTR_SW (bb)
290
B1078
Rev. Q
APPENDIX I
General
Transmission capacity Equipment code: Frequency range (GHz) ITU-R Rec. System Configuration Type of modulation Input / output interface Scrambler Adaptive equalization Digital service channels Line interface Omnibus voice circuit Way-side traffic
Technical Specifications
34 Mb/s (optional) NL243 NL242 1.7-2.7 4.4-4.8 F.283-5 and F746 Annex 2 NL241 NL245 7.125-7.725 7.7-8.5 F.385-6 F386-4 NL248 NL247 12.75-13.25 14.50-15.35 F.497-4 F.636
Hot stand-by, 1+0, up to 2+1 frequency diversity, space diversity 4 PSK with coherent detection ITU-T Rec. G.703, HDB3 13 bits parallel 7 tap BB transversal equalizer 5 x 64 kb/s ITU-T Rec. G.703/V.11 (optional) 0.3 to 3.4 kHz, PCM (optional) 2 Mb/s, ITU-T Rec. G.703, HDB3
Transmitter / Receiver
Equipment code: RF output level at ref.point B' Noise figure ref.point B' Threshold BER=10-3 Frequency stability Intermediate frequency Dynamic range
NL243 +29dBm 3.7 dB -83dBm 10ppm 70 MHz 60dB
NL242 +26.5dBm 4.5 dB -82.5dBm
NL241 +28dBm 4.5 dB -82.5dBm
NL245 +27.5dBm 4.5 dB -82.5dBm
NL248 +24dBm 5.5 dB -81.5dBm
NL247 +21dBm 6.0 dB -81.5dBm
Supervision
Supervision system Element manager
Built-in supervision system monitored via HHT PC-based software available as option
Primary power
Nominal battery voltage 20V to 60V DC Power consumption: Basic 1+1 terminal without options Approx 120W
Mechanical characteristics
Rack dimensions Complete 1+1 terminal Weight of 1+1 terminal
120 x 260 x 2032 mm (W x D x H) One rack Approx. 30 kg (complete indoor installation)
Environmental conditions
Temperature range: operation within specifications storage EMC
B1078 Rev. R
According to ETS 300 019-1-1 and 2 -5OC to +45OC -40OC to +70OC According to Draft pr ETS 300 385 for grade B equipment
291

292
B1078 Rev. R
APPENDIX II
AAU ACU AOU AIS ALC ALM ASIC ATPC BB CH1 CH2 CHP CLK CODEC CRC-4 CTS DDF DEMUX DIL DIP DRO DTMF EMC EOW EPROM GND HBER HDB3 HHT IF
Abbreviations
Alarm Adapter Unit Alarm Collection Unit Alarm Out Unit Alarm Indication Signal Automatic Level Control Alarm Application Specified Integrated Circuit Adaptive Transmitter Power Control BaseBand Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel Protection Clock Coder/Decoder Cyclic Redundancy Check Clear To Send Data Distribution Frame Demultiplexer Dual In-Line Dual In-Line Package Dielectric Resonator Oscillator Dual Tone Multi Frequency Electromagnetic Compability Engineering Order Wire Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Ground High Bit Error Rate High Density Bipolar (max. 3 "0") Hand-Held terminal Intermediate Frequency
B1078
Rev. R
293
LBER LCD LED LNA LSB MSB MUX NC NI NRZ O&M-PC PAL PC PLL PRBS PROM RCVR RF RMT RTS RXD SIC SU TTL TXD VCO VCXO VLSI XMTR XO
Low Bit Error Rate Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Low Noise Amplifier Least Significant Bit Most Significant Bit Multiplexer No Connection Network Interface No Return to Zero Operation & Maintenance Personal Computer Programmable Array Logic Personal Computer Phase Locked Loop Pseudo Random Bit Sequence Programmable Read Only Memory Receiver Radio Frequency Remote Ready To Send Receive Data Serial Interface Controller Supervisory Unit Transistor to Transistor Logic Transmit Data Voltage Controlled Oscillator Voltage Controlled crystal Oscillator Very Large Scale of Integration Transmitter Crystal Oscillator
294
B1078
Rev. R
APPENDIX III
A
Index
Adapter 2Mb/s, 2KN213A ......................................................... 213 Adapter 64 kb/s, 2KN182B ....................................................... 210 Adapter Connections ................................................................ 68 Adaptive Alarms ........................................................................ 144 Add/Drop Repeaters ................................................................. 85 Alarm Adapter Unit .................................................................... 159 Alarm Adapter Unit, 2KN181A .................................................. 207 Alarm Out Unit, 2KN225A ......................................................... 225 Alarms Main Alarm ......................................................................... 279 Urgent Alarm ...................................................................... 279, 280 Alignment Switch Hybrid Board ................................................ 82 Alignment/Switch/Hybrid, 2NCS468A ....................................... 186 ATPC ........................................................................................ 115, 182
B
Bit Insert/Extract/ACU, 2CN64B ............................................... 184 Bit Insert/Extract/ACU Board .................................................... 81
C
Cable Connection SU-HHT ....................................................... 93 Channel Synchronization ......................................................... 72 Collective Call ........................................................................... 71 Use of collective call .......................................................... 71 Connection Panel UWB340 ...................................................... 221 Connection Panel UWB341 ...................................................... 220
D
Data Distribution Frame ........................................................... 69, 78 Data Interconnection ................................................................ 73 DDF Panel ................................................................................ 78 Distribution of Control Signal .................................................... 218
E
External Loudspeaker ............................................................... 71
B1078
Rev. R
295
F
Fault Finding ............................................................................. 277 FREQUENCY SETTING ........................................................... 233, 239 Front Connections .................................................................... 70 Fuse ......................................................................................... 43
H
Hand Held terminal (HHT) ......................................................... 92 Configuration Menu ........................................................... 106 Display layout .................................................................... 98 Fault Menu ......................................................................... 132 Internal Unit Address .......................................................... 101 Key functions ..................................................................... 94 Menu system ...................................................................... 99 Network Configuration ....................................................... 113 Network Serial Port ............................................................ 111 Parameter Access ............................................................. 102 Password Menu ................................................................. 157 Quality Menu ...................................................................... 145 Section Address ................................................................. 100 Security Menu ................................................................... 119 Start-up menu .................................................................... 103 Station Address .................................................................. 100 Station and unit address .................................................... 99 System Type ...................................................................... 109 Test menu ........................................................................... 147 Transmitter Power Control .................................................. 115
I
Indicator & Connection Unit ..................................................... 77
L
List of alarms ............................................................................ 135 Loop types ................................................................................ 148
M
Modem, 8MDN77B ................................................................... 181 Multiplexer/Demultiplexer .......................................................... 83 Mux/Demux 16x2, 2NCS521A ................................................... 193
296
B1078
Rev. R
N
Negative Battery ....................................................................... 219
P
PABX Adapter, 2N579A ............................................................ 215 Parity Error .............................................................................. 72 Positive Battery ......................................................................... 219
R
RF CHANNEL ARRANGEMENT ................................................ 242
S
Selective Call ............................................................................ 71 Use of selective call ........................................................... 71 Service Channel Collective Call, 2NF467A ............................... 204 Service Channel Selective Call, 2NF533A ................................ 199 Service Telephone Connection ................................................. 71 Space Diversity Controller Board ............................................. 80 Supervisory & Subinsert, 2KCN178B ....................................... 187 Switch Matrix Board .................................................................. 84 Switch Matrix Board, 2NCS522A .............................................. 195
T
Technical Specifications ........................................................... 291 Transceiver Unit ........................................................................ 79
U
Use of speech controlled switch ............................................... 71
B1078
Rev. R
297

User Manual NL24x Family 16x2 and 34 Mb/s Radio-Relay Equipment

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

User Manual NL24x Family 16x2 and 34 Mb/s Radio-Relay Equipment

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

USER MANUAL NL24x Family 16x2 and 34 Mb/s Radio-Relay Equipment

Section I Section II Section III Section IV Section IV

Installation Operators Guide Configuration Frequency Setting Fault Finding

This page is intentionally left blank

15-10-98 26-11-98 15-12-98

This page is intentionally left blank

This page is intentionally left blank

This page is intentionally left blank

SECTION III ........................................................... 179

SECTION IV........................................................... 231

SECTION V ........................................................... 277

This page is intentionally left blank

This page is intentionally left blank

PACKING,HANDLING AND STORING

Storing and Inspection Upon Arrival

Preparation for Installation

160 TERMINAL 1 + 1 TERMINAL REPEATER 1 + 1 280 400

I-46299 Rev. A RACK ARRANGEMENT

I-46227 Rev. C OUTLINE DIMENSIONS SLIM RACK

RACK EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

List of Installation Material

Mounting Procedure Floor Mounting

Support of Rack Top

5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/Z63'LY ,5HY$

5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/ ,5HY$

5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/5(3 ,5HY$

5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/5(3Z63'LY ,5HY$

RACK LAYOUT CONNECTION PANELS I-46307 Rev. A

(;7(51$/&211(&7,216 &211(&7,213$1(/%$6(%$1' ,5HY$

EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS SUPERVISORY & SUBINSERT I-33458 Rev. A

MONITOR CONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER I-33462 Rev. A

(;7(51$/&211(&7,216 '')3$1(/ ,5HY$

EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS SERVICE TELEPHONE I-33459 Rev. A

(;7(51$/&211(&7,216 ,1',&$725&211(&7,213$1(/ ,5HY$

EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ALARM ADAPTER UNIT I-33460 Rev. A

EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS 64kb/s ADAPTER I-33461 Rev. A

I-33464 Rev A DOCUMENT SURVEY EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

INDICATOR CONNECTION PANEL

MCC270 DDF- PANEL

SPACE DIVERCITY CONTROLLER UNIT

SPACE DIVERCITY COMBINER UNIT HOT STANDBY CONTROLLER UNIT

16x2 Mb/s MUX/DEMUX or ALIGNMENT/SWITCH/HYBRID or SWITCH MATRIX UNIT at repeaters

I-46305 Rev A RACK UNIT LAYOUT TERMINAL 1+1 37

I-46304 Rev A RACK UNIT LAYOUT TERMINAL 2+1 w/SPACE DIV.

INDICATOR CONNECTION PANEL

SPACE DIVERSITY DELAY

ALARM ADAPTER UNIT or 64kb/s ADAPTER or POWER SUPPLY

INDICATOR CONNECTION PANEL MCC270 DDF- PANEL MCC270

HOT STANDBY SW CONTROL

ALIGN. SW & HYB, or 16x2Mb/s MUX/DEMUX, ADD/DROP SW MATRIX, or U-Link board *

TRANSCEIVER CH.1 CH.1 ADAPTER ADAPTER

MODEM CH.1 PROT ADAPTER ADAPTER

TRANSCEIVER PROT PWR PWR

MODEM PROT PWR CH.1 PWR ADAPTER

TRANSCEIVER CH.1 ADAPTER

MODEM CH.1 PROT ADAPTER ADAPTER

INDICATOR CONNECTION PANEL

SPACE DIVERSITY DELAY

UWB320 CONNECTION PANEL, XCVR ( No external connections )

ALARM OUT UNIT

Connector type: D-Sub 37 way female, DIN 41652

DDF - PANEL MCC270

5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/Z63'LY ,5HY$

5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/ ,5HY$

5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/5(3 ,5HY$

5$&.81,7/$<287 7(50,1$/5(3Z63'LY ,5HY$

(;7(51$/&211(&7,216 &211(&7,213$1(/%$6(%$1' ,5HY$

(;7(51$/&211(&7,216 '')3$1(/ ,5HY$

(;7(51$/&211(&7,216 ,1',&$725&211(&7,213$1(/ ,5HY$